Sie sind auf Seite 1von 184

Installation Guide

Alcatel 1350
Management Suite

1350 Rel.7.4
Network Release

3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1350 REL.7.4 INSTALLATION GUIDE

TABLE OF CONTENTS
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 PRELIMINARY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Handbook applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Product-release handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 Handbooks related to the specific software application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Referred External Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1 Related Handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Registered Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7
7
7
8
8
8
9
10
10
10

2 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Requested Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Initial Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 HPUX Operating System Installation & Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Predispose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Instance creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Software copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.5 Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.6 Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.7 Network Management SubSystems Fuctional Dependencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.8 Optional Network Management SubSystems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
11
11
15
16
16
16
16
16
16
18
19
20

3 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Quick Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1 HPUX Operating System Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2 System Predisposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3 HPUX Operating System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4 Install and Customize Alcatel Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.5 Final Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21
22
22
23
26
28
31

02

061127

01

060724

ED

DATE

ECR38607

F.Casasole

B.Bosisio
M.Occhietti
B.Bosisio
M.Occhietti

F.Casasole
CHANGE NOTE

APPRAISAL AUTHORITY

ORIGINATOR

1350 Management Suite


NR7.4
INSTALLATION GUIDE

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

1 / 178

32
32
37
57
58
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
86
88
88
90
95
99
99
103
111
123
124
125

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4 ADD NEW NMS/NMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127


4.1 Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.1 Previous installation status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.2 Network Release Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.3 Disk space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.1.4 Reboot Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
4.2 Install a new NMS/NMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2.1 Customize NMS Instance or NMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
4.2.2 NMC Special Insertions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
4.2.3 1359HA OSResilience Specific Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5 TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Identify a Failure Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Failure installing a HPUXt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Recoverable Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1 Recoverable Faults Installing Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2 Recoverable Faults Managing SWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Kerberos Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.1 Kerberos kdcd Process Not Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4.2 Kerberos kdcd High CPU Consuming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Device Full . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.1 Devise Full on /var Mounted File System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5.2 Device full on /usr and /home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Inittab Process Not restarting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Installing and Configuring Mirror Disk/UXt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.1 Mirror Disk/UXt Installation Prerequisite. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.2 Mirror Disk/UXt Configuration Prerequisite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7.3 Mirror Disk/UXt Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED

135
135
135
136
136
138
140
140
140
141
141
141
143
144
144
144
144

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

2 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2 OPERATING SYSTEM Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


3.2.1 Preparatory activities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2 Installing HPUX 11i . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3 Virtual Array Command Authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Software PACKAGE Predispose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 OSConf Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 Update Platform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 Create Depots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 Before Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 PreInstallation Actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6 Install NMS Description and NR7 Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.7 Predispose for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8 1359HA OSResilience Post Predisposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Operating System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1 Node Name Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2 Synchronize the Clocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3 Poseidon License Management Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Install and Customize Alcatel Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1 Install and Customize OSKernel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2 Install and Customize NMS and NMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3 Install and Customize 1353NM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6 FINAL INTEGRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.1 Final Integration Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.6.2 Alarm Surveillance Federation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

APPENDIX A SYSTEM TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


A.1 Find the CDROM/DVDRMO Device File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2 System Shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.1 System Shutdown with Reboot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A.2.2 System Halt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

145
145
146
146
146

APPENDIX B NMS/NMC SPECIFIC DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


B.1 NMS Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.2 NMC Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.3 Disk Requirement Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B.4 Alcatel CD Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

147
147
148
149
150

APPENDIX C GOGLOBALUX INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


C.1 GoGlobalUX Installation on HPUX System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2 GoGlobalUX Installation on PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.2.1 Automatic Removal of GoGlobalUX/Previous Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3 GoGlobalUX license . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.1 License servers definition rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.2 Retrieve License Servers Identity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.3 Permanent License Request . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.4 GoGlobalUX authorization procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C.3.5 Add a new license(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

151
151
151
154
155
155
155
156
160
165

APPENDIX D HP 9000 SERVER CABLE CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


D.1 HP9000 K Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.2 HP 9000 R Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.3 HP9000 L Class and RP5430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.4 HP9000 A Class and RP2430 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.5 HP9000 RP3410 and RP3440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.6 HP9000 RP4440 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.6.1 RP4440 with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.6.2 RP4440 with MSA30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7 HP9000 N Class and RP7400 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7.1 HP9000 N Class and RP7400 with SC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7.2 HP9000 RP7400 with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7.3 HP9000 RP7410 with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D.7.4 HP9000 RP7410 Cluster with VA7110 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

167
167
170
171
172
172
173
173
174
175
175
176
177
178

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

3 / 178

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FIGURES
Figure 1. GPS/MP to Wcable connecion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 2. F/F adaptor cable to connect PC to HP GSP/MP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 3. Installation Phases on a server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 4. Example of TMN configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 5. NMS functional dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 6. Example of disk configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 7. Alcatel NMS Architecture. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 8. 1359HA OSResilience communication example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 9. Network Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 10. NTP Configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 11. List of existing instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 12. NMS Customize Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 13. NMS Customize trace window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 14. List of existing instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 15. 1353NM Customize Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 16. 1353NM Customize Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 17. 1353NM Custom Product Selection N.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 18. 1353NM Custom Product Selection N.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 19. 1353NM Custom Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 20. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom System Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 21. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom Parameters Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 22. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom Execution window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 23. Add 1359HA OSResilience Starting configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 24. Add 1359HA OSResilience Final configuration Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 25. GoGlobalUX Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 26. GraphOn License WEB Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 27. GraphOn License WEB Page Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 28. GraphOn License WEB Page Software Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 29. GraphOn License WEB Page License Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 30. GraphOn License WEB Page License Output Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 31. Rear view of server with two disk cabinets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 32. Rear view of server with one disk cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 33. Example of K server cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 34. Rear view of server R with one disk cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 35. Front view of L Server (without cover panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 36. Rear view of L Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 37. Front view of A Class and RP2430 Servers (without cover panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 38. RP3410 and RP3440 Server Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 39. RP4440 Front View without fromt pannel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 40. RP4440 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 41. RP4440 Front View withou fron pannel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 42. RP4440 Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 43. Rear view of N/RP74xx Server with SC10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 44. RP7400 Server with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 45. Rear view of RP7410 Server with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Figure 46. Rear view of RP7410 Server with DS2405 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12
12
15
17
18
51
61
86
89
90
108
108
110
115
115
117
117
118
118
121
121
122
130
131
151
156
156
157
158
159
167
168
169
170
171
171
172
172
173
173
174
174
175
176
177
178

TABLES
Table 1. Optional Network Management Subsystem Applicability Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 2. NR7.4 NMS/NMC table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19
29

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

4 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Table 3. List of supported hardware components: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Table 4. 1353NM Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 5. Involved IP Network Node table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 6. IP Network Description example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 7. Three Server Redundant License Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 8. Single License Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 9. NR7.4 NMS/NMC table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 10. Disk requirements for NMS Software for NR7.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 11. Disk Requirements for NMS Instances for NR7.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Table 12. Alcatel NR7.4 Media codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ED

32
73
88
89
95
95
103
149
149
150

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

5 / 178

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED
Edition
Date
Notes

Ed. 01
July 2006
NR7.4 Installation Guide

Ed. 02
November 2006
NR7.4 new addendum issue.
1354BM ATM has been included.

3AL 88924 BAAA

178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HISTORY

02

6 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1 PRELIMINARY
1.1 General Information
WARNING
ALCATEL makes no warranty of any kind with regards to this manual, and specifically disclaims the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. ALCATEL will not be liable
for errors contained herein or for damages, whether direct, indirect, consequential, incidental, or special, in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this material.
NOTICE
The product specification and/or performance levels contained in this document are for information
purposes only and are subject to change without notice. They do not represent any obligation on the
part of ALCATEL.
COPYRIGHT NOTIFICATION
The technical information of this manual is the property of ALCATEL and must not be copied, reproduced or disclosed to a third party without written consent.

1.2 Handbook applicability


This handbook applies to the following product-releases:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ANV P/N

1350

3AL 88852 AAAA

PRODUCT

RELEASE

VERSION (N.B.)

ANV P/N

1350

7.4

7.4

3AL 88851 AEAA

N.B.

ED

PRODUCT

NOTES FOR HANDBOOKS RELEVANT TO SOFTWARE APPLICATIONS


Handbooks relevant to software applications (typically the Operators Handbooks) are not modified unless the new software version distributed to Customers implies manmachine interface
changes or in case of slight modifications not affecting the understanding of the explained procedures.
Moreover, should the screen prints included in the handbook contain the product-releases version marking, they are not replaced in the handbooks related to a subsequent version, if the
screen contents are unchanged.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

7 / 178

The list of handbooks given here below is valid on the issue date of this Handbook and
can be changed without any obligation for ALCATEL to update it in this Handbook.
Some of the handbooks listed here below may not be available on the issue date of this
Handbook.
The standard Customer Documentation in the English language for the equipment whose product-release-version is stated in para.1.2 on page 7 consists of the following handbooks:

1.3.1 Handbooks related to the specific software application


HANDBOOK

REF

ANV Part No.

[1]

1350 Rel7.4
Installation Guide

3AL 88924 BAAA

[2]

1350 Rel7.4
Administration Guide

3AL 88924 AAAA

THIS
HANDBOOK

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1.4 Referred External Documents


[3]

HP System Partitions Guide Revision 3.1


 Copyright 2002 HewlettPackard Company. All rights reserved.
Part Number: B235590746

[4]

1350 Management Suite Upgrade Guide 7.4

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

8 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.3 Product-release handbooks

1.4.1 Related Handbooks

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

REF

ED

HANDBOOK

ANV Part No.

[5]

1353NM 7.3
Administration Guide

3AL 89082 BAAA

[6]

1354RM 7.4
Administration Guide

3AL 61112 BAAA

[7]

1354BM 7.1A
ATM Administration Guide

3AG 23948 BAAA

[8]

1354BM 7.3E
ETH Administration Guide

3AL 86503 BAAA

[9]

1354BM 7.2R
PR Installation Guide

3AL 86506 BAAA

[10]

1355VPN 5.0
Administration Guide

3AL 72136 CAAA

[11]

1359HA 7.1 OSCluster


Installation and Administration Guide

3AL 88127 BAAA

[12]

1359HA 7.1 OSResilience


Administration Handbook

3AL 88129 BAAA

[13]

1359IOO 5.2
Administration Guide

3AL 88346 AAAA

[14]

1359ISN 5.0
Administration Guide

3AL 88219 AAAA

[15]

1354SY 7.4
Administration Guide

3AL 70908 BAAA

THIS
HANDBOOK
or note

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

9 / 178

UNIX is a registered trademark of UNIX System Laboratories in the U.S.A. and other countries.

OSF/Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation.

HP is a registered trademark of HewlettPackard Corporation.

HP9000/700 and HPUX are trademarks of HewlettPackard Corporation.

HP OpenView and HP OpenView Window are trademarks of HewlettPackard.

ORACLE is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.

1.6 Overview
This document describes how to install and configure the HP 9000 computer systems in order to allow the
correct usage of the Alcatel NMS application Software.

1.7 Conventions

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The following conventions are used in this manual:


[Enter]

A key name is shown between square brackets to indicate that you press a
named key on the keyboard.

courier

Courier type is uses to indicate the output produced by the system or data that
you can find.

bold italic

Bold italic letters indicate informations that you must enter from the keyboard.

<data>

Data shown between angle brackets means that these data depending by the
particular instance of the system. It must be substituted with the correct data.

Actions must be performed as root.

..,sys,root #

Actions must be performed as root.

..,$

Actions must be performed as normal user (not as root).

..,oracle>

Actions must be performed as oracle user.

SQL>

Actions must be performed in SQL utility.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

10 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1.5 Registered Trademarks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2 INTRODUCTION
This document describes how to install Alcatel Network Management Subsystem (NMS) on a HP 9000
system devoted to this purpose. The initial installation is foreseen for machine where the operating system
is not installed, it includes HPUX 11i V1 for PARISC and the third party software requested by an
NMS and NMC.
If you have HP 9000 system already installed for NR7.4, you can use this document for installing a new
NMS, new NMC or create new NMS instance (refer to chapter 4 Add New NMS/NMC at page 127).
If the machine has been installed with previous NR7 platform, it is suggested to evaluate the opportunity
to upgrade the current installation to NR7.4 following the 1350 Upgrade guidelines [4].

2.1 Installation Requirements


Hereafter the bill of materials requested to be able to carry on installation.
2.1.1 Requested Hardware
The supporter HP9000 hardware configuration is specified in the paragraph 3.2.1.1 Check HP 9000
Hardware Configuration at page 32. To completely define the HP 9000 server or workstation configuration you have to compute the amount of disk space requested by the Alcatel NMS you plan to install.
Then add the items shown in the following paragraphs.
2.1.1.1 Requested Network Equipments
The installation of a HPUX can not be carried on without connecting the server or workstation to a Local
Area Network (LAN), because of this the minimum equipment required are:
1)

Two BT LAN cables.

2)

Two Local Area Network plug or a stand alone Ethernet Hub.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The installation can not be performed if the LAN card it is not connected to the LAN plug or a
stand alone Ethernet Hub.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

11 / 178

To be able to perform Alcatel TMN systems installation you have to be able to perfomor some actions by
using HP9000 server console and some other have to done via Graphical User Interface (GUI), for these
reasones the personal computer must be equipped with one RS232 and one Local Area Network (LAN)
ports. The RS232 port have to be connected with the HP 9000 server console (see the HP 9000 server
specific documetaion to know how to find it).
Hereafter an example that shows how to connect HP 9000 L1000 server console to a PC. HP 9000 server
class L, A, N and rp are equipped with a specific processor that allows the system remote control. This
procssor name can be Guardian Service Processor (GSP) or Managenet Processor (MP) depending by
model. In both cases it has a RS232 port where a A519163001 cable has to be connected to. The
A519163001 is call W cable, bacuse you have just a 25 pins RS232 connector splitted in three 9 pins
connectors, and one of them is mark with Console:
Lan Connector RS232 Connector

GSP/MP Connector

A519163001
WCable

Console connector.

Figure 1. GPS/MP to Wcable connecion.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A F/F Adapter cable have to be used to connect the PC RSR 232 port with the A519163001 Wcable
console. The cable schema is shwon in Figure 2.
3

Tx

Tx

Rx

Rx 2

RTS

RTS 7

CTS

CTS 8

DSR

DSR 6

S.G.

S.G. 5

DCD

DCD 1

DTR

DTR 4

RI

RI

Figure 2. F/F adaptor cable to connect PC to HP GSP/MP


The GUI acces to HP 9000 server in provided by installing GoGlobalUX software (see 1350 Administration Guide [2] for more information) and connecting the PC to Local Area Network where the HP 9000
server is connected to.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

12 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2.1.1.2 Requested PC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2.1.1.3 Required GoGlobal UX License


GoGlobal UX needs a permanent or temporary license to be able to run (see 1350 Administration Guide
[2] for more information).
2.1.1.4 Requested Hard Disks
The hard disk requirements within NR7.4 are strictly related to the NMS you are installing, and the size
of the instances of them.
Another specific behavior of OSConf is related to the primary SWAP/DUMP management, in fact the default size of this fundamental system area is defined as the double of the core memory size. Because of
this the minimum disk space requirement for HPUX installation depends by the machine core memory
size, and can be summarize in the following:
8 G byte for machine with up to 1 G bytes of core memory
18 G byte for machine with of core memory up size between 1 and 4 G bytes
36 G bytes for machine with of core memory up size between 5 and 8 G bytes
72 G bytes for machine with of core memory up size between 9 and 16 G bytes
To compute the required space total amount use the following formulas:
For single volume systems:
<Unix>+<Software>+<Data>=<amount of disk space>
For multiple volume systems, there are two formulas: one for computing the amount of space required on
system volume group (vg00), and another one for the data:
System volume formula:
<Unix>+(<Software>+<Not protected Data>)*115/100=<amount of disk space>
Data volume formula:
<Data>*115/100=<amount of disk space>
N.B.

The system can not share the same physical hardware, that means to implement a
multiple volume system you need al least one hard disk drive for each data volume.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Where:
<Unix>

Means the amount of disk space requested by HPUX operating system, it


can be assumed as up to 6 Gbyte for programs (HP and 3PP), where you have
to add the disk space devoted to store swap and crash areas. The amount of
swap space can be computed as the higher value between the RAM size multiplied per two and the sum of swap size required by each NMS you have to instal
and NMSInstance you have to create, refer to Table 10. (page 149) and
Table 11. (page 149) for the NMS swap requirements. The size of crash area
within /var/adm/crash directory, it corresponds to half of core memory size.

<Software>

Means the amount of requested disk space for storing the software. Its value
can be computed by summing the code size defined by each NMS you have to
install, refer to Table 10. (page 149).
NOTE: OSKernel has to be always installed.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

13 / 178

Means the amount of requested for data storage. If you are computing the value
for a single volume system, you sum the data size defined by each NMS
instance you have to create, refer to Table 11. (page 149).
For the multiple volume group each NMS instance defines the data size for the
volume group.

<Non protected Data> Means the amount of requested for data storage defined not protected by
1359HA OSCluster. For this kind of data there is no difference in management
between single or multiple volume system, you sum the data size defined by
each NMSinstance you have to install.
Independently by the results of the computation the minimum disk requirement are specified
at the beginning of this paragraph.

N.B.

Example: To install a 1354RM 7.1 with one Master Large instance and 1353NM 7.0 with two Presentation
instances on a HP9000 server equipped with 3Gbyte RAM.
Single volume:
The size of primary swap/dump area will be 3*2*1024 Mbyte=6144 Mbyte, the amount of requested
swap will be: (500+7500)+(500+2*250) Mbyte=9000 Mbyte, so 9000 Mbyte is the higher value, and
it will be used. So the total a mount of operating system you have to add: 6114 Mbyte for HP and
3PP software, 9000 Mbyte for swap areas, and 1536 Mbyte for crash area. The result will be: 16650
The you have to add: 1800 Mbyte for OSKernel, 3600 Mbyte for 1353NM , 1000 Mbyte for 1354RM
to compute the disk space amount for Alcatel Software. Total 6400 Mbyte.
The last the value for the data instances: 8000 Mbyte for 1354RM, 2*100 Mbyte for 1353NM. Total
8200 Mbyte.
16650+(6400+8200)115/100=33440
You need 4x9Gbyte or 2x18Gbyte or 1x36Gbyte. Moreover, if you want to use this system as depot
machine, you have also to add other disks.
Multi Volume:
The difference with the previous is only related to the 1354RM data instance, that will be place in a
different volume group. So the system volume group will need:
16650+(6400+200)115/100=24240
Data volume group:
8000*115/100=9200
For the multiple volume group configuration you need 3x9Gbyte or 2x18Gbyte or 1x36Gbyte for system volume group, and one 9Gbyte or 18Gbyte or 36 Gbyte for the data.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

IF YOU CONFIGURE THE MIRROR DISK/UX FEATURE, YOU MUST PROVIDE THE
DOUBLE OF THE HARD DISK SIZE COMPUTED.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

14 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

<Data>

2.2 Initial Installation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The NR7 initial installation approach allow to distinguish six main activities:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)

HPUX Operating System Installation & Configuratione


Predispose
Instance creation
Software copy
Customization
Integration

The following picture shows the NR7 installation process on a server, starting from an empty system up
to an operational one. Each step adds a something new in term of areas, software or references.

Predispose

HPUX

Instance
Creation

HPUX 11i

HPUX 11i

HPUX 11i

NMS2_1_Vx_Master

NMS2_1_Vx_Master

SW copy

NMS2_2_Vx_Master

NMS2_2_Vx_Master

NMS1_1_Vx_Master

NMS2_1_Vx_Client

NMS2_2_Vx_Client

NMS1_1_Vx_Master

NMS2_1_Vx_Client

NMS2_2_Vx_Client

Customize

Integration

File system

OSKernel, NMS

OSKernel, NMS

OSKernel, NMS

HPUX 11i

HPUX 11i

HPUX 11i

Internal data reference

Exterenal data reference

Integration reference

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 3. Installation Phases on a server.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

15 / 178

The HPUX 11i operating system installation is performed to setup a new system or recicle an old one,
that is not installed with the right operating system version. The previous hard disk contents will be lost.
2.2.2 Predispose
Predispose allows predisposing HPUX for Alcatel software installation and execution, in terms of: kernel
parameter, file system (size, location), and software layer products. These data have to be provided with
a Software Packages Description (SWPDESC). A specific set of program will prerare the system as requested.
N.B.

This activity can require the system reboot.

2.2.3 Instance creation


Instance creation allows to predispose HPUX for Alcatel data instances is a process like predispose, but
related to the data. Also the data instance requiremensts have to defined in the Software Packages Description.
N.B.

This activity can require the system reboot and can be combined with predispose.

2.2.4 Software copy


The software copy is the most important installation phase, when the entire Alcatel Network Management
software is copied from the distribution media to the installation target.
2.2.5 Customization
The customization phase adapts the data instance to target system performing the following actions:

Creates empty data structure.

Makes links with the installed management software.

Compiles parameter files by setting the values relevant for instance configuration.
2.2.6 Integration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Integration phase allows to join together feature of different NMSs when it is foreseen.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

16 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2.2.1 HPUX Operating System Installation & Configuration

1354RM
Presentation

1354RM_1_Vy_M

HPUX 11i

1353NM_2_Vx_C

OSKernel, 1353NM Vx
1354RM Vy Software

1353NM_1_Vx_C

1354RM_1_Vy_C

1353NM_2_Vx_C

1353NM_1_Vx_C

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1354RM
Master

OSKernel, 1353NM Vx
1354RM Vy Software

HPUX 11i

1353NM_1_Vx_M

1353NM_2_Vx_M

OSKernel,
1353NM Vx Software

OSKernel,
1353NM Vx Software

HPUX 11i
1353NM
Master

HPUX 11i
1353NM
Master

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 4. Example of TMN configuration

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

17 / 178

The 1350 Management Suite is a multilayer architecture where NMS (Network Management SubSystems) can require functionalities provided by other NMSs. This implies dependencies in the system isntallation.
The following figure summarizes the dependencies among the NMSs: NMSs shown in the upper level require the installation of NMS located in the lower layers.
N.B.

OSKernel is required for all NMSs.

1354SY

1354BM
ATM

1354BM
ETH

Mediator

1354BM
PR
1355VPN

1354RM

1353NM

OSKERNEL

Figure 5. NMS functional dependency


Some NMS foresees two configurations: master and client. In this case client instances have to be installed
whenever the master is located in different host (distributed configuration).
1353NM only foresees multiple client instances on the same host.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

18 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2.2.7 Network Management SubSystems Fuctional Dependencies

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

2.2.8 Optional Network Management SubSystems


Alcatel Networks Management Suite foresees optional Subsystems such as: 1359ISN, 1359IOO, and
1359HA ORResilience. These subsystems enhance other NMS feature, adding interfaces and high
availability. Here after the optional NMS applicabilty table.
Optional NMS

Applicable NMS

1359ISN

1354RM

1359IOO

1353NM 1354BMATM 1354BMETH 1354BMPR 1354RM 1354SY

1359HA OSResilience

1353NM 1354BMATM 1354BMETH 1354BMPR 1354RM

Table 1. Optional Network Management Subsystem Applicability Table

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

19 / 178

2.3 Restriction

The minimum hard disk space supported is height Gbyte.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

this configuration is allowed only for machine with up to 512 Mbyte of core memory, for
larger amount of memory the minimum disk requirement is higher.

The boot disk size has to be larger than double of the core memory size.

The machine configuration not included in the List of supported hardware Table 3. at page 32 are
not guarantee.

The usage of the Virtual Array LUN for booting is forbidden.

The usage of hard disk larger than 300 GB is not allowed for booting.

Only one Virtual Array unit is allowed.

The usage of dual access disks with mirror disk option is not allowed for booting.

OSConf use /etc/lvmpvg to correcly manage the Mirror Disk/UX configuration and file system extension. Manual changes of this file are forbibben!

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

20 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The OSConf 7.1.1 has the following restrictions:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3 INSTALLATION
This chapter shows how to install Alcatel Network Management Subsystems on a HP9000 system included in the supported hardware configurations defined in paragraph 3.2.1.1 Check HP9000 Hardware Configuration at page 32.
For upgrade or migration refer to 1350 Management Suite Upgrade Guide 7.4 [4]

VERY IMPORTANT!!
Before proceed in the installation, upgrade or migration you have to visit the OND Technical Excellence Center WEB site (http://tec.ond.alcatel.it/), looking for additional installation notes. This notes are available within Network Release section, selecting:
NR7.4 > installation_notes.
The installation done by following the information provided by this chapter causes the complete removal
of hard disks involved.
The chapter contents:

Quick Installation

Complete installation summary deeply described in the


following sections.

Operating System Installation

HPUX11i operating system installation.

Software Package Predispose

Operating system and third party software predisposal for


Alcatel Software installations.

Operating System Configuration

Configure HPUX 11i for communication.

Install and Customize Alcatel Software

Installing an customizing Alcatel software and related data

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

21 / 178

a quick installation guide for speed up the installation task. The current edition of the document provides
information useful for installing the Alcatel NMS/NMC HPUX based software.
Before start with installation it is strong recommended to read the software release notes
and check on the related Product Support Center WEB site for any warning and known
problems!

3.1.1 HPUX Operating System Installation


The HPUX O.S. installation is requested for new machine or systems installed before NR7.
NOTE: The HPUX installation delete the entire disk contents.
NOTE: It is advisable to execute the Preparatory Activities shown at paragraph 3.2.1 page 32.

Insert CDROM SWPOSCONF_BOOTV7.1.1 (1/1 in case of DVD, 1/2 in case of CD) in the
driver.
Boot or reboot the system from CD/DVD.
Reply the question issued:

Keyboard type choosing from the shown list (workstation only).

Enter the timezone of your geographic area.

Check the current system time and change it when needed.

Enter the hostname


NOTE: The hostname MUST begin with an alphabetical lowercase characters and
and contain ONLY alphabetical lowercase character and numerical digits .

Enter IP address

Enter the default gateway and subnetwork mask when they are present.
NOTE: the procedure check default gateway executing a ping

Enter the memory size to be used for swap area configuration, you can leave the default value.

Enter CDROM device to be used as default source media, you can leave the default value

Choose to install and configure mirrored disks only if there is the related license.

Choose to install and configure Hp Storage Work Virtual Array only when HP VA7110 disk storage is present in the hardware configuration.

Choose primary boot disk in the provided list,


NOTE: In some cases more than one disk can be required.

When the mirror disk has been selected, also the alternate boot disk will be required.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The system will perform the requested activities in unattended mode. Wait the end of installation, it can
take from 30 up to 90 minutes. When the system will prompt you for logging, log in as root and check
in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log for any error before proceed.
For more information see at Chapter 3.2 at page 32.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

22 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1 Quick Installation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.2 System Predisposal


When the HPUX operating system installation is completed proceed with the system predisposal as
shown in the following.
3.1.2.1 OSConf Engine and 3PP Description installation.
First of all you have to install OSConf Engine and 3PP description.

Insert the SWPOSCONF_ADDV7.1.1_P04 1/1 in the driver.


Mount it by entering the command:
...,sys,root # mount o rr /dev/dsk/<device name> /SD_CDROM[Enter]
Install the OSCONF engine and 3PP description by executing:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM OSCONF OSC3PP [Enter]
If the machine does not reboot, dismount the medium and remove it from the driver:
...,sys,root # umount /SD_CDROM [Enter]

3.1.2.2 Install Alcatel NMS Software Description and Install Wizard


Then install Alcatel NMS Software Description.

Insert the SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the driver.


Mount it by entering the command:
...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<device name> /SD_CDROM[Enter]
=>END: device c0t0d0 mounted on /SD_CDROM, CD/DVD format is cdfs
Install the Alcatel NMS Description by executing:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM/SWPDESCV7405 .sdpkg SWPDESC [Enter]
Install the Alcatel Install Wizard:
...,sys,root # cd /SD_CDROM [Enter]
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_WizardR7.4.0P08 [Enter]
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_Wizard_CMDR7.4.0P15 [Enter]
...,sys,root # cd [Enter]
Dismount the CD and remove it from CD or DVD drive:
...,sys,root # umount /SD_CDROM [Enter]

3.1.2.3 Create Software Depot

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If you have to install many systems, you have now the opportunity to create a software depot that allow
you to proceed in the installation without swap CD from a machine to the other, refer to paragraph 3.3.3
at page 60 and 1350 Rel7.4 Administration Guide [2].

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

23 / 178

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Now you have to predispose in one shot the entire system, that means you must know which system configuration you have to create, in term of software and data. Because there are some possible Alcatel NMS/
NMC combinations, it is advisable to identify the software and the data instances you have to predispose
for before stating.
Now you can start the predisposal by running scmanageswp as shown hereafter:

Login the system as root

Enter the command:


...,sys,root # scmanageswp

On the SWP MAIN MENU choose:


1 [Enter]
Predispose new SWP

On the next one:


3
Predispose from Descriptors installed on the system.

The list of software available for predispose will be shown, select the item you want to predispose for by referring the column identified by <Product> S.

When all of them have been selected, enter q[Enter] until you do not get to the SWP MAIN
MENU.

On the SWP MAIN MENU choose:


4 [Enter] Create new SWP INSTANCE.
A list will be shown with the software that foreseen an instance.

You have now to create the data instance for the software by choosing the items from the list,
but considering the following rules:

Create the OSKernel Global Instance.

Create the NMS Instances Master and/or Presentation, taking also into account the functional dependencies shown in paragraphs 2.2.7 and 2.2.8 at page 19.

For each instance selected, a set of questions will be issued (for more info refer to paragraph
Predispose for Installing 3.3.7 at page 64):

Choose one of the possible instance foreseen for the software show as a list.

Enter the Instance number for identification.


NOTE: The instance identifier have to be defined in a plan, and be unique for the
Master instances.
NOTE: The presentation instance number must be equal to the related master!
NOTE: The spare instance number must be equal to related Master (1359HA OS
Cluster only).
NOTE: Remember the instance number, because it has to be entered again later.
NOTE: For NMS Cohosted with 1359HA OSResilience, create the client file system
for the NMS lower layers (refer to Network Management SubSystem Functional
Dependencies paragraph 2.2.7 at page 18 for architecture, and to 1359HA OSResilience Post Predisposal paragraph 3.3.8 page 86 for more information).

Enter no at the question related to the multiple volume group configuration.

Confirm your choice only if the data enter is correct.

When all the foreseen software data instance have been declared, enter q[Enter] until you do
not get to the SWP MAIN MENU.

At the SWP MAIN MENU prompt enter:


a[Enter] Apply

The list of the pending action will be shown, if everything is correct enter: a [Enter] to start the
predisposal.

The procedure will compute the system requirements in terms of disk space, and it can ask you
for add unused available disks to the current configuration (see paragraph 3.3.7.6.3 at page 82
for more info).

Then, it will ask you for the third party software, you can choose to retrieve it from depot (if any)
or from CD ( see paragraph 3.3.7.6.1 at page 81 for more information).

Enter your choice and provide:

The CD device file or simply confirm the default.

The depot location <hostname>:/<depot directory>

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

24 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.2.4 Run System Predisposal

Then the procedure will show you just some trace, asking you sometimes to press enter to continue.
After the following message you have to press [Enter] key to perform the system reboot:
=>>> WARNING: Now SCINSTALL will be invoked to activate the mod...
The installation will run unattended !!!
Press [Enter] to continue.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

***** The system reboots automatically, please wait *****


If you are installing from depot the procedure will proceed unattended. If you are installing with
CD, the request of the medium will be issued in console issuing a message that reports the CD
label.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

25 / 178

At this step you have to perform these system configurations:

Configure the /etc/hosts.

Configure NTP protocol.

Configure license manager.


3.1.3.1 Configure /etc/hosts
You have to enter in /etc/hosts file two information for any machine this system have to communicate with:
IP address and name.
The machine you have to include are:

Hosts involved in TNM application.

Printers

Licences management systems.

Time synchronization systems.


Refer to paragraph 3.4.1 at page 88 for more information.
3.1.3.2 Configure NTP
The NTP configuration foresees to know the time reference systems in the network, because the NTP configuration foresees many possible scenarios see at paragraph 3.4.2 at page 90 for more information. Hereafter are shown the two most useful configurations for the current system, it can receive (client) or distribute (server) time reference clock.
3.1.3.2.1 Configure as NTP Client
To configure your machine as NTP client, login the system as root user and execute scxntp this way:
a)
b)
c)

Enter 1 at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt to Add a new NTP server.
Enter the time server host name (if defined in /etc/hosts) or IP address.
Set it as preferred.

If you have more than one time server, execute again a ) and b ), but do not set the second as preferred.
d)
e)
f)
g)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

h)

ED

Enter 9 at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt to Align the time to server.
Enter 8 at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt to Start/Stop NTP server.
If the message Would you like to start xntpd automatically at reboot (y/n) is
shown, enter y to configure NTP daemon to start automatically at system startup.
Start the NTP daemon replaying with y[Enter] to message:
NTP server is stop
Would you like to start it (y/n) ?
Exit by entering e[Enter] at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

26 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.3 HPUX Operating System Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.3.2.2 Configure as NTP Server


If you do not have any external time source, you can configure your machine as NTP server, login the system as root user and execute scxntp this way:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

f)

Enter 5 at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt to Configure NTP on local clock.
Enter y[Enter] at the question:
Would you like to set Local Clock as preferred source (y/n) ?
Enter 8 at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt to Start/Stop NTP server.
If the message Would you like to start xntpd automatically at reboot (y/n) is
shown, enter y to configure NTP daemon to start automatically at system startup.
Start the NTP daemon replaying with y[Enter] to message:
NTP server is stop
Would you like to start it (y/n) ?
Exit by entering e[Enter] at OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration menu prompt.

3.1.3.3 Configure License


To be able to run software you have to authorize the execution by registering licence keys. There are two
kind of license: Alcatel for network management software and GraphOn X emulation.
Both license keys have the same two phases approach: the license request and the license set up. The
former have to be done for the entire network management system. The latter for every machine.
3.1.3.3.1 License request
To be able to configure the licence you have to define the license server machines by following these rules:

If you have a network management with up to two HP 9000 systems, you have to define one of them
as license server, and ask for a single node license.

If you have three or more systems, you have to choose three of them and ask for a three server redundant license.
N.B.

The license have to be requested for the entire system.

N.B.

The license have to refer to the license server host identifier and NOT to the server
where the application have to be run on.

For each license server you have to retrieve the system host identifier by entering:
For Alcatel license:
...,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmhostid [Enter]
For GraphOn license: ...,sys,root # /opt/graphon/bin/lmhostid [Enter]
The shown host id have to be provided during the license request, for the three server redundant configuration all three host id have to be provided at once.
Retrieve the license file, and edit it by adding the port number 27010 at the end of each SERVER line
in the Alcatel license file, instead 27011 in the GraphOn GoGlobalUX one.
3.1.3.3.2 Alcatel License Setup

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Store the license file into the file /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat of any machine.
Verify the license server are correctly declared within /etc/hosts file.
Start the license daemon on any machine by entering the command:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon stop [Enter]
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon start [Enter]
3.1.3.3.3 Check the license server
To check the license server availability and license status enter the command:
...,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmstat a c /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat[Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

27 / 178

Store the license file into the file /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat of license server machines, create
file /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat with a line like the following for each license server:
SERVER <hostname> 27001
Copy this file in the same location of each NMS machine.
Verify the license server are correctly declared within /etc/hosts file.
Start the license daemon on any machine by entering the command, on each machine.
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux stop [Enter]
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux start [Enter]
3.1.3.3.5 Check the license server
To check the license server availability and license status enter the command:
...,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmstat a c /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat[Enter]
3.1.4 Install and Customize Alcatel Software
Finally you are ready to install and customize the Alcatel software on the target system. This activity is
performed by the Alcatel Install Wizard just following this short procedure:
N.B.

Before start check if you have the necessary CDROM or an accessible depot with the entire
software.

N.B.

Check if the depot machine or distribution CD are available, and if local system is correctly authorized to access the files (see 3.3.5.2 and 3.3.5.3 for more informations).

3.1.4.1 Install and Customize OSKernel


The first software you have to install and customize is OSKernel.
N.B.

Do not execute this procedure via GoGlobalUX!


Login the system as root user.
Change directory: ...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard [Enter]
Install and customize OSKernel by entering:

From CDROM:

Insert the SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the driver.


N.B.
If a different media is present in the drive the installation can fail!

...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<device name> /SD_CDROM[Enter]

...,sys,root # ./Install.sh OSKERNEL cdrom [Enter]

When required, replace the current CD with the requested one.

...,sys,root # umount /SD_CDROM [Enter]

Remove CD from the drive.


From depot:

...,sys,root # ./Install.sh OSKERNEL[Enter]

Provide the host name or IP Address of the depot system:


NOTE:
Provide DEPOT hostname or address ?

Provide the directory where the depot is located on depot system:


NOTE:
Provide DEPOT PATHNAME [/alcatel/DEPOT] ?

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.
Do not interrupt the procedure!

Once installation phase will be completed, the procedure will request a confirm for the execution of
the customization tool, confirm the operation.

When the procedure will be terminated, verify that no error are shown (warnings can be ignored).

Check also /alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installation_OSKERNEL_*.log trace file.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

28 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.3.3.4 GraphOn GoGlobalUX License Setup

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.4.2 Install and Customize NMS and NMC


The product installation and customization process has been unified in NR7, with some little differences
mentioned when needed. For more detailed information refer to paragraphs: 3.5.3 at page 111 and 3.5.2.1
at page 104.
Hereafter the product list manageable this way:
Version

NMS/NMC Name

Description

1353NM

7.3 (7.3.6)

Network Element Manager

1354BM ETH

7.3 (7.3.0.5 P2)

Broadband Ethernet Manager

1354BM ATM

7.1.4

Broadband Atm Manager

1354BM PR

7.2 (7.2.4)

Broadband Packet Ring Manager

1354RM

7.4 (7.4.3.2)

Regional Manager

1354SY

7.4 (7.4.0.2)

Synchronization Manager

1355VPN

5.3 (5.3.0)

Virtual Private Network

1359HA OSReslience

7.1 (7.1.1 P03)

High Availability Operating System Resilience

1359IOO

5.2 (5.2.0.5)

Generic O.S. O.S. Interface

1359ISN

5.0 (5.0.0.5)

ISN Open Interface

Table 2. NR7.4 NMS/NMC table


N.B.

The NMS and NMC installation and customization have to be executed with graphical interface.
Login the system with graphical interface as root user.
Change directory: ...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard [Enter]
Install and customize the designed software package (NMS/NMC) by entering:

From CDROM:

insert CD SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the driver.


N.B.
If a different media is present in the drive the installation can fail!

...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter[

...,sys,root # ./Install.sh <NMS/NMC Name> cdrom [Enter]

Provide the CD on demand.


From depot:

...,sys,root # ./Install.sh <NMS/NMC Name> [Enter]

Provide the host name or IP Address of the depot system:


NOTE:
Provide DEPOT hostname or address ?

Provide the directory where the depot is located on depot system:


NOTE:
Provide DEPOT PATHNAME [/alcatel/DEPOT] ?

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.
Do not interrupt the procedure!

1353NM Only: The 1353NM installation will require you to confirm the installation of the 1353SH 5
and 6 interface feature (see paragraph 3.5.3 at page 111 for more information):
NOTE: Do you want to execute 1353NM Install package to manage NR5/6
1353SH? [y|n|q]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

29 / 178

Once installation phase will be completed, the procedure will request a confirm for the execution of
the customization tool, confirm the operation.
The Custom interface will show you the System Instances List window, you have to select
Choose_one button and set it to NewInstance, then Apply & exit in the Actions menu.
The custom Parameters Definition window will be shown on the screen, it allows you to set the relevant NMS/NMC variables.
Set the value, then Apply & exit in the Actions menu to start the execution.
1353NM Only: An additional window will be shown to select an Element Manager subset (see 3.5.3.2
a page 114 for more information).
When the procedure will be terminated, verify that no error are shown (warnings can be ignored).
Check also /alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installer_<NMS/NMC Name>_*.log trace file.

3.1.4.2.1 Customize Multiple NMS/NMC Instance


The installation procedure is combined with the first instance customization of just installed software, this
usually covers the installation process. Some NMS/NMC foresees to have more than one instance, in this
case you have to execute again the Customization process for each of them without the first one.

Start customize process entering the command:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard[Enter]
...,sys,root # ./Install.sh custom <NMS/NMC Name> [Enter]

Then at the System Instances List window, you have to select Choose_one button and set it to
NewInstance, then Apply & exit in the Actions menu.

The custom Parameters Definition window will be shown on the screen, set the relevant for the next
instance of NMS/NMC.

Apply & exit in the Actions menu to start the execution.


Repeat these steps for each instance.
3.1.4.3 Proceed in the Process Configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Now you have to proceed with the specific NMS/NMC configuration, refer to the NMS/NMC specific administration guide.
When the configuration of the current system will be performed, you can proceed with the installation, customization and configuration of the next machine.
When all TMN systems will be installed, customized, configured, and connected via TCP/IP, you can proceed with the integration.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

30 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.1.5 Final Integration


When all TNM machines have been configured in standalone, you have to run on each one of them the
final integration script.
...,sys,root # /alcatel/Kernel/script/UpdateNetworkConnections.pl [Enter]
For each system that have to be integrated the following question can be issued:
1354RM_3: Run the Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
If you reply y the system will be integrated, and the procedure will issue also these other questions:
1354RM_3: Run the PLT Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
1354RM_3: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of [y/n]
1354RM_3: Run the Navigation Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
Reply y to all of them.
Warning and error messages will advice you that the remote system is not reachable or not properly configured, and the machine will be not integrated. If such kind of message are issued, identify the problem, fix
it, and run again the integration script.
Example:
WARNING: 1353RM_3: Connection problems with <hostname>. Skipping Update.
When the procedure will be successfully executed, you will be able to use all the Network Management
System features.
3.1.5.1 Integration when there is a 1354BM ETH Master
In case of a 1354BMETH Master that has to be integrated with a 1354RM, do not integrate PLT and
Backup/Restore (SMF) when requested.
Here is an example :
...
NOTE: 1354RM_17.1: MasterMaster Communication Integration (PLT) of 1354BMETH_17.3 can
be performed...
1354RM_17.1: Run the PLT Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]
NOTE: 1354RM_17.1: Backup/Restore Integration (SMF) of 1354BMETH_17.3 can be performed...
1354RM_17.1: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]
3.1.5.2 Integration when there is a 1354BM PR Master

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In case of a 1354BMPR Master that has to be integrated with a 1354RM or 1353NM, do not integrate
PLT and Backup/Restore (SMF) when requested.
Here is an example :
...
NOTE: 1354RM_17.1: MasterMaster Communication Integration (PLT) of 1354BMPR_17.2 can be
performed...
1354RM_17.1: Run the PLT Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]
NOTE: 1354RM_17.1: Backup/Restore Integration (SMF) of 1354BMPR_17.2 can be performed...
1354RM_17.1: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]
...
NOTE: 1353NM_17.0: MasterMaster Communication Integration (PLT) of 1354BMPR_17.2 can be
performed...
1353NM_17.0: Run the PLT Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]
NOTE: 1353NM_17.0: Backup/Restore Integration (SMF) of 1354BMPR_17.2 can be performed...
1353NM_17.0: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of 1354BMETH_17.3? [y/n] n [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

31 / 178

This chapter describes the first part of initial installation, it explains how to perform a HPUX 11i Operating
System installation.
N.B.

NEVER EXECUTE IT ON A SYSTEM IN SERVICE.


The activity deletes the entire contents of the hard disk involved.
Before start with installation it is strong recommended to read the software release notes
and check on the related Product Support Center WEB site for any warning and known
problems!

3.2.1 Preparatory activities


Before proceeding in the HPUX 11i installation it is advisable to prepare all the hardware and software
components for the installation.

Check the system hardware configuration

Check the cable connections

Initialize the Virtual Array

Operating System Configuration data


3.2.1.1 Check HP9000 Hardware Configuration
This paragraph shows the HP hardware where the OSConf has been validated. The correct behavior of
the procedure on different hardware is not guarantee.
Table 3. List of supported hardware components:

Optional Cards

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HP9000 Model
Workstation B2000

B5509BA
A4974A
C6362A

100BaseT PCI LAN Adapter


PCI Single Ended SCSI
Stand alone DDS2 4GB native DAT driver

Workstation B2600

B5509BA
A4974A
C6362A

100BaseT PCI LAN Adapter


PCI Single Ended SCSI
Stand alone DDS2 4GB native DAT driver

Server R380 R390

A5220A
A4107A
J3516A
A3312AZ

HP 9000 DVD ROM Device


FWD SCSI2 Controller
HSC FF 100BaseX Dual Port LAN Adptr
HA Factory Racked Storage Enclosure

Server K360 K370 K380

A5220A
A4107A
J3516A
A3312AZ
28696A

HP 9000 DVD ROM Device


FWD SCSI2 Controller
HSC FF 100BaseX Dual Port LAN Adptr
HA Factory Racked Storage Enclosure
HPPB FWD SCSI2 host adapter

Server L1000 L2000

A5557A
A5230A
C6364A
C5708A

DVD ROM Device for LClass systems


PCI 100BaseT LAN Adapter
SMART Desktop SE DDS3 DAT module
DDS 3 Data Cartridge, 24GB/125m

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

32 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2 OPERATING SYSTEM Installation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

HP9000 Model

Optional Cards

Server RP2430

A5230A
C4314A
C6364A

PCI 100BaseT LAN Adapter


SMART Desktop DVDROM module
SMART Desktop SE DDS3 DAT module

Server N4000

A5838A
A5272AZ
C4318SZ
Opt. 108
C6365A
A4800A
C6379A
A6795A
A6250AZ
A7295AZ

PCI 2 Port 100BaseT 2 Port Ultra2 SCSI


SureStore E Disk System SC10
SMART Family Full Height Enclosure
DVDROM Drive Factory Racked
SMART SE DDS3 DAT Drive, field racked
PCI FWD SCSI2 card for HP 9000 Server
SMART Field Integrated DLT 8000 module
PCI 2GB FIber Channel Adapter
Disk System 2405 Factory Rack
VA 7110 Dual Cntl,512MB Cache Fact Inst

Server RP5430

A5557A
A5230A
C6364A
A5557A
C5687B
A6795A
A6250AZ
A7295AZ

DVD ROM Device for HP Svr rp54X0 systems


PCI 10/100BaseT LAN Adptr for rp24X0
SMART Desktop SE DDS3 DAT module
DVD ROM Device for HP Svr rp54X0 systems
HP SureStore DAT40e 40GB Ext UNIX comp
PCI 2GB FIber Channel Adapter
Disk System 2405 Factory Rack
VA 7110 Dual Cntl,512MB Cache Fact Inst

Server RP7400

A5838A
A5272AZ
A6795A
A6250AZ
C7508AZ
C7499A
A7295AZ

PCI 2 Port 100BaseT 2 Port Ultra2 SCSI


SureStore E Disk Sys SC10 Factory Rack
PCI 2GB FIber Channel Adapter
Disk System 2405 Factory Rack
HP SureStore Tape Array 5300 (factory)
HP SureStore DVDROM Array Module
VA 7110 Dual Cntl,512MB Cache Fact Inst

Server RP7410

A5838A
A5272AZ
A6795A
A6250AZ
C7498A
C7456A
C7499A
A7295AZ

PCI 2 Port 100BaseT 2 Port Ultra2 SCSI


SureStore E Disk Sys SC10 Factory Rack
PCI 2GB FIber Channel Adapter
Disk System 2405 Factory Rack
HP DAT 24m Array Module
HP DLT 80m Array Module
HP SureStore DVDROM Array Module
VA 7110 Dual Cntl,512MB Cache Fact Inst

Server RP3410

C5687C
A9919A

HP DAT 40 External Tape Drive


HP server DVDROM drive, Slimline

Server RP3440

C5687C
A9919A

HP DAT 40 External Tape Drive


HP server DVDROM drive, Slimline

Server RP4440

A7163A
A6795A
A6250AZ
A5230A

DVD drive (read only) for 4U chassis


PCI 2GB FIber Channel Adapter
Disk System 2405 Factory Rack
PCI 10/100BaseT LAN Adptr

The HP 9000 server cable connections are shown in APPENDIX D at page 167.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

33 / 178

When a Virtual Array is powered on for the first time it is possible that you have to format disks to be able
to access it.
To proceed with the Virtual Array format you must connect the console terminal to the RS232 port of either
array controller (refer to HP Virtual Array Installation Guide for more information).
As soon as you have connected the console press [Enter] key, and the VA have to reply with the prompt.
The prompt shows the VA status followed by major sign >, you have to check if the status value is ready,
if it is not, wait up to ten minutes,to allow the start up termination. If after ten minutes the status is still different than ready , you have to try the full reset of the VA by entering:
...> vfpmgr r full [Enter]
Do not perform the Virtual Array format on a system already operational, the format command destroys all the data present on the system!
When the reset is completed, check again the VA status, if the status is still Not Ready and especially
if the status is No map you have to format it by entering the command:
No map> vfpfmt [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The command will also reset the VA, if also with the format the status do not change to Ready, call the
hardware support.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

34 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.1.2 Initialize the Virtual Array

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.1.3 Operating System Configuration Data


To be able to carry out the operation system installation you have to know some information. The following
form can be helpful to prepare this data in advance:
The Hostname must contain only numbers and alphabetic characters in lower case,
starting with an alphabetic character.
Upper case and special characters are FORBIDDEN!
OPERATING SYSTEM BASIC DATA
IP Address:_____._____._____._____

Hostname:____________________________

TimeZone:_______________________
Gateway Address:_____._____._____._____ Subnet Mask:_____._____._____.______
Core Memory Size:________________

Source Device:/dev/dsk/________________

Mirror Disk Option:  Yes  No

Command View SDM:  Yes

 No

System Boot disk: /dev/dsk/___________ Alternate Boot Disk: /dev/dsk/___________

The items shown in bold are required.

N.B.

IP Address,Gateway Address, Subnetmask and Hostname must be defined in agreement with the Customer TCP/IP addressing plan. Be careful with IP Address and Hostname, because it can be some times
impossible to change them later.
Timezone is usually the time zone where the system is located and the definition is simplified by the menu
that shows you the possible areas. Do not define the local time with GMT0 time zone, except if the
system is really located in Greenwich time zone area.
For Core Memory Size it is intended the amount of RAM equipped on the system, it is automatically detected by the procedure and shown as default choice, you have just to confirm if the shown value is correct.
Mirror Disk/UX and The CommandView SDM are HP software that can be installed on demand. Both
of them are available only for 64bit processor and can be installed only if the Customer had bought the
license. The installation of these software is forbidden on system where there is no evidence of the
related license royalties to HP.
Source Device means the CDROM or DVDROM device will be used to retrieve the software. It is automatically detected by the procedure.
The last information requested is related to the disks. The System Boot disk is the hard disk on which HP
UX will be installed on, the required space is 8 Gbyte(1), and the minimum disk size allowed is 4 Gbyte.
If the Mirror Disk/UX as been requested, the procedure will issue also the request for the alternate boot
disk.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(1) HPUX 11i required at least eight Gbyte with a machine with up to one Gbyte of RAM, the operating
system can be stored in two four Gbyte disks.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

35 / 178

The following list summarizes the actions performed during the operating system installation:

3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
8)

Boot from bootable disk.


HPUX Basic configuration information data entry in the order:

Time zone of the system via selection menu.

Hostname

IP address

Subnetmask [Optional]

Gateway [Optional]

Core memory size

Source device

Mirror/Disk UX Software installation option

Command View Software installation option

System Boot disk selection.

Alternate Boot disk selection (2)


The Boot disk(s) will be initialized.
All the file systems and swap areas will be created
The Operating System will be installed on the selected boot disk.
The optional software will be automatically installed, if any.
The Mirror Disk/UX will be configured, if selected.
The GoGlobalUX and OSConf software will be installed.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)
2)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(2)The Alternate Boot disk is asked only when the Mirror/Disk UX has been selected.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

36 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2 Installing HPUX 11i


The HPUX operating system is the first software installed on a new system, this task is performed by
using the OSConf bootable CD/DVD.
3.2.2.1 Installing HPUX 11i from Bootable Medium
This chapter describes how to manage with the bootable media interface with the different configurations
that it allows.
3.2.2.1.1 Boot the machine
Power on the HP 9000 system. If your system is active, simply power off and power on it again.
The machine automatically starts up, issuing some messages. Wait until the following message appears
on the screen:
To discontinue, press any key within 10 seconds
and press any key to interrupt the boot sequence.
The Main Menu menu will be shown on the display.
Find the id of the driver, entering the search command:
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > search [Enter]
You have to identify the medium driver that you want to use in the provided device list.
This is an example for workstations:
Path Number
P0
P1
P2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

Device Path

Device Type

SESCSI.2.0
FWSCSI.6.0
FWSCSI.5.0

TOSHIBA CDROM
SEAGATE ST34572WS
SEAGATE ST32171W

For HP9000 B2000 workstation the CD/DVD driver it is usually on IDE.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

37 / 178

This is an example for server:

P0
P1
P2

Device Path

Device Path(mnem)

10/0.6
10/12/5.3
10/12/6.0

SESCSI.2.0
FWSCSI.6.0
FWSCSI.5.0

Device Type

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Path Number

Random access media


Random access media
Lan Module

The driver is usually connected to SCSI Single Ended Target 2 (SESCSI.2.0).

N.B.

This is an example of another modality to display the devices for the 64bit series server:

Path Number
P0
P1
P2
P3
P4

N.B.

Device Path(dec)

Device Type

8/4.9
8/4.8
8/16/5.6
8/16/5.2
8/16/6.0

Random access
Random access
Random access
Random access
Lan Module

media
media
media
media

In this case, the driver is connected to SCSI Single Ended Target 2 (8/16/5.2).

Insert the bootable CDROM 1/2 or DVD 1/1 into the driver.
When the LED of the CDROM device stops blinking, boot by entering the boot command:
Main Menu: Enter command or menu > boot P<n> [Enter]
where P<n> is the path number corresponding at the driver.
The system asks you if you want to perform an interactive boot, reply as shown below:
Interact with IPL (Y, N, Q) > n [Enter]
Booting...
ISL Revision A.00.43 Apr 12, 2000
ISL booting hpux (;0): INSTALL
Boot
...
The system shows you the start of boot with the following message:
ALCATEL INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
OSCONF Technology
__________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

__________________________________________________________________________

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

38 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.2 Keyboard selection


The first question issued is related to the keyboard selection, this is relevant only for hp 9000 workstations, if you are installing a hp 9000 server via console, the procedure will skip it and you have to go to
paragraph 3.2.2.1.3 Time Zone Selection.
The script explains how to declare the type of keyboard. It asks you if the keyboard that it has been set
is right:
The keyboardmap has been set to PS2_DIN_US_English (QWERTY)
Is this correct?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit, then press [Enter]
Enter y if the keyboard is right, otherwise enter n and the system prompts you:
A USB interface has been detected on this system.
In order to use a keyboard on this interface, you must specify
a language mapping which will be used by X windows and
the Internal Terminal Emulator (ITE).
The characters 1234567890 will appear as !@#$^&*()
on keyboards that use the shift key to type a number.
Your choice will be stored in the file /etc/kbdlang

1)
3)
5)
7)
9)
11)
13)
15)
17)
19)
21)
23)
25)
27)

USB_PS2_DIN_Belgian
USB_PS2_DIN_Danish
USB_PS2_DIN_Euro_Spanish
USB_PS2_DIN_French
USB_PS2_DIN_German
USB_PS2_DIN_Italian
USB_PS2_DIN_JIS_109
USB_PS2_DIN_Norwegian
USB_PS2_DIN_S_Chinese
USB_PS2_DIN_Swedish_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Swiss_German2
USB_PS2_DIN_T_Chinese
USB_PS2_DIN_UK_English_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_US_English_Euro

2)
4)
6)
8)
10)
12)
14)
16)
18)
20)
22)
24)
26)

USB_PS2_DIN_Belgian_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Danish_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Euro_Spanish_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_French_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_German_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Italian_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Korean
USB_PS2_DIN_Norwegian_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Swedish
USB_PS2_DIN_Swiss_French2_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_Swiss_German2_Euro
USB_PS2_DIN_UK_English
USB_PS2_DIN_US_English

Enter the number of the language you want: <language_number> [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

You have selected the keyboard language PS2_DIN_xxxxx


Please confirm your choice by pressing RETURN or enter a new number :
[Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

39 / 178

To allow the set up of time zone and time of the system related to the geographical location of the machine
the program issues a sequence of menu, choose the time zone appropriate for the country where the machine will be operative.
In the following an example shows how to set the Middle European Time Daylight Saving Time (MET
DST), if you are not in the middle European area you have to choose your timezone:
At the first question you have to enter the number of the seven areas of the world:
__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________
The following procedure enables you to set the time zone.
Select your location from the following list:
1) North America or Hawaii
2) Central America
3) South America
4) Europe
5) Africa
6) Asia
7) Australia, New Zealand
___________________________________________________________________________
Enter the number for your location (17) then press [Enter] 4 [Enter]
The items of the next question depends by the area chosen in the previous one, for Europe these will be
the following:
___________________________________________________________________________
Select your time zone from the following list:
1) Greenwich Mean Time

British Summer Time


2) Portuguese Winter Time
Portuguese Summer Time
3) Western European Time
Western European Summer Time
4) Middle European Time

Middle European Summer Time


5) Iceland time
6) Turkey, Finland, Romania, Greece, Bulgaria / Summer Time
7) Western Russia (Moscow) Western Russia Summer Time
8) Unlisted time zone
9) Previous menu
___________________________________________________________________________
Enter the number for your time zone (1 9), then press [Enter] 4 [Enter]
The last time zone selection question is the final confirmation:
___________________________________________________________________________
You have selected:
Middle European Time/Summer Time (MET1METDST).
___________________________________________________________________________
Is this correct?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]
1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

It the choice is correct enter y [Enter], to confirm your selection an go on with the next section.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

40 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.3 Time Zone Selection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.4 Time Adjusting


After the time zone definition, it is opportune to review also the machine time and date, for this reason the
program foreseen to issue the following confirmation question:
___________________________________________________________________________
This section enables you to set the system clock.
___________________________________________________________________________
The current system time is Tue Jan 20 10:55:34 MET 2004
Is this correct?
Press [y] for yes or [n] for no, then press [Enter]
If you confirm the time and date, the procedure will proceed with the Hostname Definition paragraph
3.2.2.1.5 at page 42. Otherwise it will ask you to enter the new date and time issuing the following questions:
___________________________________________________________________________
You will be prompted for the date and time.
Please enter numerically values of month, for example January is 1 or 01.
The values in the parentheses give the acceptable range of responses.
__________________________________________________________________________
Please enter the year (19702037) or last two digit, then press [Enter]
Please enter the month (112), then press [Enter]
Please enter the date of the month (131), then press [Enter]
Please enter the hour (using 24 hour time) (023), then press [Enter]
Please enter the minute (059), then press [Enter]
Then the new date and time will be shown for another confirmation:
You have entered: Apr 8 10:30:00 MET1METDST 2003.
This time will be used to reset the system clock.
Is this value correct?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If you confirm the procedure will go on, otherwise it will go back asking again for the date and time.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

41 / 178

This section of the program ask you to enter the mnemonic name of the machine also known as hostname.
Enter the hostname foreseen for machine following the guide line shown in the instruction:
The Hostname must contain only numbers and alphabetic characters in lower case,
starting with an alphabetic character.
Upper case and special characters are FORBIDDEN!
This section enables you to enter Hostname.
___________________________________________________________________________
For the system to operate correctly, you must assign it a unique
system name or hostname. The hostname can be a simple name (example:
widget)
A simple name must:
* Start and end with a letter or number.
* Contain no more than 8 characters.
* Contain only letters, numbers, underscore (_), or dash ().
The underscore (_) is not recommended.
NOTE: The hostname should contain 8 characters or less
for compatibility with HPUX uname.
The current hostname is unknown. You cannot configure networking
or run HPCDE if the hostname is unknown. Please choose another name.
___________________________________________________________________________
Just pressing [Enter] will keep the (not recommended) name unknown
Enter the system name [unknown]: hosta[Enter]
Enter the hostname and press [Enter] key, then procedure will ask you to confirm your choice, if you enter
the right name confirm it by entering y [Enter].
You have chosen hosta as the name for this system.
Is this correct?

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

42 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.5 Hostname Definition

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.6 IP Address Setup


The most important information to be able to connect your system to the Local Area Network (LAN) is the
Internet Protocol (IP) address, you must take care of this information because it is not allowed to have two
nodes on the network with the same IP address. The IP address have to be in agreement with the LAN
administration rules.
This section enables you to enter ip_address.
___________________________________________________________________________
If you wish networking to operate correctly, you must assign the
system a unique Internet Protocol (IP) address. The IP address must:
* Contain 4 numeric components.
* Have a period (.) separating each numeric component.
* Contain numbers between 0 and 255.
For example:

134.32.3.10

Warning: Leading zeros within a component signify an octal number!


If you have not yet obtained an IP address from your local system
administrator, you may use the default address of 127.0.0.1 by
pressing [Enter].
___________________________________________________________________________
Enter your IP address, [127.0.0.1]:
The installation procedure will show you the entered IP address, double check it before confirming it!
You have chosen 192.200.49.3 as the IP address for this system.
Is this correct?

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

43 / 178

This section allows to define the subnetwork mask and the gateway, these two information are fundamental to allow your system to access machines place by outside of your LAN. If your system does not need
to communicate with machines outside your LAN you can skip this section by answering n to the next
question. Its also suggested to skip this section if you do not have the subnetwork mask and gateway information or simply your machine is stand alone.
Even in case your machine is stand alone, it is mandatory to connect the primary lan card
to a network hub or switch.
___________________________________________________________________________
Additional Network Parameters: Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway
This section enables you to specify the subnetwork mask and default
network gateway. This information is necessary if your network has
gateways and you wish to communicate beyond your local subnetwork.
You will need to know the following information:
* Subnetwork mask
* Default gateway IP address
___________________________________________________________________________
Do you wish to specify this information?
Press [y] for yes or [n] for no, then press [Enter]
In case you do not have the subnet mask and default gateway information available skip this section by
entering n [Enter] and go to paragraph Swap/Dump Sizing 3.2.2.1.8 at page 46, otherwise enter y[Enter]
and proceed with the following:
___________________________________________________________________________
Additional Network Parameters: Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway
Enter the subnetwork mask and default gateway information.
Example:
Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
Current Settings:
> Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
(default)
Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
(default)
___________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enter the new subnetwork mask, [255.255.255.0]:


The default netmask foreseen for the IP address previously assigned to the system, press [Enter] if it is
the right one, or enter a new one followed by [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

44 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.7 SubNetwork Mask and GateWay setup

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The procedure will update the window contents (Current Setting) with new value and it will prompt you for
the gateway address:
___________________________________________________________________________
Additional Network Parameters: Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway
Enter the subnetwork mask and default gateway information.
Example:
Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
Current Settings:
Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
> Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
(default)
___________________________________________________________________________
Enter the gateway address [192.200.49.1]:
The procedure shows you a default IP address for the gateway, if it corresponds to the right one, just confirm it by pressing [Enter], otherwise enter the correct one and [Enter]
___________________________________________________________________________
Additional Network Parameters: Subnetwork Mask and Default Gateway
Enter the subnetwork mask and default gateway information.
Example:
Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
Current Settings:
Subnetwork mask:
255.255.255.0
Gateway IP address: 192.200.49.1
___________________________________________________________________________
Are the parameters above correct?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]
Before proceeding with the next step the program shows the entered data asking to confirm them. If you
do not confirm, the procedure goes back to subnetmask data entry.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A ping to the provided gateway is also attempted to verify the correct configuration of both local and gateway IP address, and in the mean time the correct subnet mask. If the ping fails the operator will be required
to confirm his/her data entry
.... Waiting, ping system 192.200.49.1
___________________________________________________________________________

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

45 / 178

The HPUX swap dimensioning rule foresees to create a swap area large as the double of the core
memory, this rule is also followed by the OSConf installation script, but to allow different approaches the
capability to define different size of the core memory is provided.
This step in the procedure shows you the amount of core memory detected and ask you to confirm.
This section enables you to enter size of primary SWAP/DUMP area.
___________________________________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________________
The primary SWAP/DUMP area is: 2046 Mbyte
Just pressing [Enter] will keep this primary SWAP/DUMP size,
enter new value if you wish to change size.
___________________________________________________________________________
Enter primary SWAP/DUMP size in MByte [2046]:
The shown value is the primary SWAP/DUMP disk area size, it corresponds to the current amount of RAM
Core memory, Press [Enter] to confirm it or enter a different value in order to increase on reduce the disk
space used for primary SWAP/DUMP. The total amount of swap space requested will be adjusted if needed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

Do not enter a value less then 50% of RAM size, it can prevent the DUMP creation.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

46 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.8 Core Memory and Swap/Dump Sizing

3.2.2.1.9 Hardware Scanning

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Now the program is scanning the hardware looking for the present hard disks, it will take a few seconds.
Hardware detection in progress, please wait ...
Total Disk(s)
Total CD/DVD(s)

found =
found =

2
1

Press [Enter] to continue...


Then the procedure will ask you to confirm the source media as the CDROM drive.
This section enables you to enter default Source media (CdRom).
___________________________________________________________________________
Medium Selection
___________________________________________________________________________
Device
MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c3t2d0
594 0/0/2/1.2.0
___________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Please enter the Device Name of source media [c3t2d0]:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

47 / 178

Before proceeding in the hard disk assignment rules it is mandatory to define if there is any high availability
feature or device in the system. First of all, if the disk mirroring has to be implemented by procedure you
have to reply y to the next question:
This section enables you to choose for Mirror Software option.
___________________________________________________________________________
The Mirror/Disk UX software allow
the disks, to prevent system down
the license of use and the double
mirror option.
Have you to install a machine with

to create a copy of the data stored on


time due to disk failure, but requires
of the disk space requested without the
Mirror Disk capability ?

Press [y] for yes or [n] for no, then press [Enter]
To implement the disk mirroring you need to have the HP Disk Mirror/UX licence and double of the disk
space requested without the feature, for these reasons the procedure issues the following confirmation
question:
N.B.

The installation of the HP Disk Mirror/UX software without license is not allowed

WARNING
To be able to install and configure mirror software the following
requirements must be matched:
You MUST have evidence of HP Disk Mirror/UX software license
customer ownership
The hardware configuration MUST have a spare hard disk for each
one in use
Are both requirements satisfied ?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]
If you have the required items just replay with y[Enter].

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Choosing the Disk Mirror/UX installation the procedure automatically configures the mirror feature on any
Volume Group youll create in the system by using the feature of OSConf. To perform this activity the
installation will take 30 minutes more and the machine will be rebooted twice.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

48 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.10 Mirror/Disk UX Selection

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.11 Virtual Array Software Selection


The Alcatel NM application will support with OSCluster environment the virtual array disk storage VA7100
or VA7110, these hardwares require a specific management software that can be installed automatically
by answering y [Enter] to the following question:
N.B.

The installation of the virtual array disk storage software is not allowed if the hardware
is not present!

_This section enables you to select Virtual Array Manager Software.


___________________________________________________________________________
The Virtual Array Manager Software is requested just in case there is any
HP Storage Work Virtual Array hardware equipped in your system.
There is any HP Storage Work Virtual Array (VA7xxx) in the system
hardware configuration ?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

49 / 178

The next phase in the procedure bring you to define the disk configuration. The request issued by this activity depends by the previous answer. That means if you had chosen to have the disk mirror capability the
procedure will ask you disk drive to be able to make a copy of all the data. To obtain the higher availability
level is suggested to choose disk connected to different controllers. For a correct disk management it is
advisable to define the disk usage policy in advance.
3.2.2.1.12.1 Disk Mirror Configuration Policy
The disk mirror capability is used for two main purposes:
1)

Allow system to survive in case of a single disk failure.

2)

Allow system to survive in case of a single disk controller failure.

It is possible to obtain the better high availability goal only with a correct configuration of the disk resources
available on the system. HPUX Mirror Disk/UX allows to reach the first target without specific configuration, but to be able to reach the second one you must have an appropriate system configuration in terms
of hardware and software. The hardware suggested by Alcatel are design to allow mirror configuration that
allow system to survive to disk controller failure, but the software configuration has to be done as shown
in this paragraph to do not loose this capability.
First of all you have to be able to identify the hard disk present in the configuration, them are usually identified by their file name. In particular the file name can be very helpful to identify the disk controller relationship. Any disk in the configuration is identified by the following name: c#t#d#
c[015]
t[015]
d[015]

SCSI of Fiber Channel card instance of disk controller to which the disk is attached to.
SCSI of Fiber channel address of the device on the interface.
Is the device unit number, useful for disk array only, such as VA7110.

Using the c# of disk file name is possible to identify the relationship between disks and controllers.
HPUX allows to connect a single disk to two different controller (DualAccess), in this case the system
command can show two device file for the same disk units, but the installation script manage this configuration by showing just one device with a D on the first column of the related line, hereafter an example of
the selection menu shown by installation scripts:
This section enables you to select the boot disk device.
___________________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
___________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Device
MByte
Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8672
0/0/1/1.2.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c2t2d0
8672
0/0/2/0.2.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t8d0
8672
0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t9d0
8672
0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c6t12d0
8672
0/7/0/0.12.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c6t13d0
8672
0/7/0/0.13.0
_(free)_ ______
________
___________________________________________________________________________
Select Primary BOOT Disk device Name :

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

50 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.12 Disk Selection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Now you have to define two disk group (physical volume group) with the following characteristics:
1)
2)
3)
N.B.

The sum of disk space amount of the two group have to be the same.
The DualAccess disks can be assigned to any group.
The non DualAccess disks connected to the same controller MUST belong to the same group.
It is important to follow this rules starting from boot disk definition 3.2.2.1.12.2 at page
52.

The following picture is a schematic example of disk configuration that can produce the output shown before. This is not a typical system, but provided all the case that can occur in field.

c1t2d0
c2t2d0
c4t8d0

c6t12d0

c4t9d0

c6t13d0

Figure 6. Example of disk configuration

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

With this configuration the best one are:


group 1 with c1t2d0, c4t8d0 and c4t9d0, group 2 with c2t2d0, c6t12d0 and c6t13d0.
group 1 with c2t2d0, c4t8d0 and c4t9d0, group 2 with c1t2d0, c6t12d0 and c6t13d0.
Because the I/O channel are balanced.
Allowed configuration can be:
group 1 with c4t8d0, c1t2d0, and c2t2d0, group c4t9d0, c6t12d0 and c6t13d0.
Wrong configuration:
group 1 with c1t2d0, c4t8d0 and c6t12d0, group 2 with c2t2d0, c4t9d0 and c6t13d0.
Because the two non dualaccess disks have been assigned to the two groups, and the controller
failure gets the system in failure too.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

51 / 178

The first disk you have to select is the main boot disk for the system, the list of the available disk will be
shown in the window in the following format:
This section enables you to select the boot disk device.
___________________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
___________________________________________________________________________
Device
MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8672
0/0/1/1.2.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c2t2d0
8672
0/0/2/0.2.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t8d0
8672
0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t9d0
8672
0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t12d0
8672
0/7/0/0.12.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t13d0
8672
0/7/0/0.13.0
_(free)_ ______
________
___________________________________________________________________________
Select Primary BOOT Disk device Name :
Enter the disk device that will be used as boot device then press [Enter].
A D character is shown before the device name in the Device column to advice the disk is
accessible via two different disk controllers. This configuration is typically used with Fiber Channel device.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

52 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.12.2 Main Boot Disk Selection

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.12.3 Alternate Boot Disk Selection


This question will be issued only if you had selected the mirror disk option; enter the device that will be
used as alternate boot disk. To reach the highest availability level, it is advisable to choose a disk not connected to the same SCSI bus of the Main Boot Disk, this choice allows the system to survive also to a SCSI
bus failure. It is also advisable to choose a disk with the same size.
This section enables you to select the alternate boot disk device.
___________________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
___________________________________________________________________________
Device
MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8672
0/0/1/1.2.0
Pri_Boot _Main_
vg00
c2t2d0
8672
0/0/2/0.2.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t8d0
8672
0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t9d0
8672
0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t12d0
8672
0/7/0/0.12.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t13d0
8672
0/7/0/0.13.0
_(free)_ ______
________
___________________________________________________________________________
Select Alternate BOOT Disk device Name :
If the size difference between the main and alternate boot disk is bigger then one Gbyte the procedure
will issue a warning message, and it will ask you to confirm your choice.
WARNING: Difference between Primary & Alternate Boot disk size is too big
difference is:1024 MegaByte, please check your selection Is this correct?
Replay y[Enter] to confirm, or n[Enter] to change your choice.
3.2.2.1.12.4 Multiple Disk Request

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

To install minimum HPUX configuration on a machine with 512 Mbyte, 8 Gbyte of hard disk are required.
If you provide 4 Gbyte or smaller hard disks, the procedure will prompt you again until the requested
amount of disk space will be reached.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

53 / 178

3.2.2.1.12.5 Disk Selection Confirmation

After this confirm question the contents of the selected disk will be lost.
___________________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
___________________________________________________________________________
Device
MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8672
0/0/1/1.2.0
Pri_Boot _Main_
vg00
c2t2d0
8672
0/0/2/0.2.0
Alt_Boot Mirror
vg00
D c4t8d0
8672
0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______
________
D c4t9d0
8672
0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t12d0
8672
0/7/0/0.12.0
_(free)_ ______
________
c5t13d0
8672
0/7/0/0.13.0
_(free)_ ______
________
___________________________________________________________________________
These are your Disks Selection x HPUX installation on this system.
ATTENTION: The contents of selected disks will be permanent lost
Do you want CONTINUE?
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit then press [Enter]
If you are sure of your choice enter y[Enter], then the procedure will start the execution phase.
This is the last question issued by the procedure, after your reply the
procedure will operate unattended.
The procedure executed by a HP9000 L1000 server will take:
45 minutes for operating system
+30 minutes to install and configure mirror
Dont worry if the machine reboots automatically.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Press [Enter] to continue...

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

54 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

When all the disk selection will be completed, the program will ask you to confirm your choice.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.13 Execution Phase


The procedure is now entering the execution phase, it will be performed unattended.
This phase takes 45 minutes on a HP9000 L1000 server, with Fast/Wide differential hard disks. If you had
chosen the disk mirroring option the procedure will reboot two times and will take 35 minutes more.
In the following the activities performed:

To create the physical volume on the main boot disk.

To set the primary boot path.

To create the physical volume on the alternate boot disk (only for mirror disk configuration).

To set the alternate boot path (only for mirror disk configuration).

To create the Logical Volumes.

To create a new file system into the Logical Volume

To restore the HPUX dumps.

To update the configuration files

To reboot the system to activate the HPUX installed on the hard disks.

To install the Mirror/Disk UX and related patches (only for mirror disk configuration).

To configure the mirror for all the Logical Volumes (only for mirror disk configuration).

To install the Virtual Array Management software (only on demand).


Dont worry if the system reboots, it is requested by some software, to be able to configure HPUX kernel
and configure driver.
If required, replace the first installation medium, when it will be required with a specific message on the
console.
When procedure complete its task on the console youll see the message:
The system is ready.
GenericSysName [HP Release B.11.11] (see /etc/issue)
Console Login:
If you have a HPUX workstation the graphical login screen will be shown instead.
Before proceed with the next step, you have to check the execution log to verify no error has been occurred, you have to login the system a superuser root and check that no error message is shown has
explain, hereafter the messages shown at login time to advice you the installation is still in progress or
when it was failed.
3.2.2.1.14 Login Message During the Execution
Whoever is logging the system during the executing will be alert the installation is in progress by the following message:
********************

WAITING INSTALLATION IS IN PROGRESS *****************

Do not alter environment, check log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log


***************************************************************************

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Any action on the system or depot may compromise the installation.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

55 / 178

In case any error is met during the execution phase, the procedure stops and the following message is
issued:
******************* THIS SYSTEM IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED ****************
To fix the problem, check the log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log
***************************************************************************

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The procedure it is not able to recover the error by itself, look at the log file to have more information about
the error.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

56 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.2.1.15 Login Message when Installation Fails

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.2.3 Virtual Array Command Authorization


Starting with CommandView SDM version A.01.07.00, to prevent unauthorized access to the Virtual Array
configuration, an Array Security Database (ASD) has been introduced. This means that starting from
OSConf 7.0.5 to be able to configure the VA7110 it is mandatory to create an array security account. In fact the ASD is provided with a default user already defined, that allows to perform the first connection to ASD to define your own user, and it will be automatically deleted at first user definition.
Do not forget the Array Security Database user and password, otherwise no more configuration via SAM will be possible.
This is the procedure to set up the user account:
a)

Login as superuser root

b)

Start ASD administration tool:


...,sys,root # secadmin host <hostname>[Enter]
Where <hostname> is the name of the local host. For 1359HAOS Cluster configuration it is recommended to enter the physical hostname.

c)

Secadmin will prompt you asking for username, you have to replay with: Administrator
N.B.

d)

Then it will ask you for password, enter: administrator

e)

secadmin will prompt you with: <secadmin on <hostname> >: . At this prompt you have to enter
the user definition commad:
<secadmin on ... >: add user <username> group Administrator host <hostname> [Enter]
Where:
<username> means the user you whant to create.
<hostname> is the same hostmane entered staring secadmin.

f)

secadmin will prompt you to enter the password twice without echo of input by issuing the following
two prompts:
password:
reenter password:
N.B.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Be careful the username and password are case sensitive.

Do not leave the password empty, an emply password does not allow the correct login to
CommandView Java interface.

g)

Check the just defined user entering the command: list

h)

Exit the secadmin tool entering exit.

Example:
...,sys,root# secadmin host ipb083
username: Administrator
password:
<secadmin on ipb083>:add user root group administrator host ipb083
password:
reenter password:
<secadmin on ipb083>:list
Username Group
Host

root
Administrator ipb083
<secadmin on ipb083>:exit

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

57 / 178

When the HPUX 11i operating system installation is completed, the system is not yet ready for Alcatel
NMS installation; in fact NMS needs some layer software, that are usually called software platform, to be
able to perform their tasks.
3.3.1 OSConf Installation
The OSConf packages have to be installed by following this procedure:
a)

Login the just installed system as root user.

b)

Identify the device driver (see Find the CDROM/DVDROM Device File appendix A.1 at page
145).

c)

Insert the medium with label SWPOSCONF_ADDV7.1.1.P04 volume 1/1 in the driver.

d)

Mount the medium by entering the command:


...,sys,root # mount o rr /dev/dsk/<device file> /SD_CDROM [Enter]

e)

Install the OSConf packages by enter the command:


...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM OSCONF OSC3PP[Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If the procedure is carried out without error, the system is ready to be predisposed.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

58 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3 Software PACKAGE Predispose

3.3.2 Update Platform

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Keeping the CD mounted perform the software platform upgrade to OSConf 7.1.1 P04.
a)

Start the upgrade procedure by entering:


...,sys,root # /SCINSTALL/etc/scupgrade [Enter]

b)

The procedure will ask you if the software platform upgrade must be perform by CD/DVD or network
depot.
_________________________________________________________
OSC3PP 7.1.1P04 Upgrade Procedure
LAYERED PRODUCTS Repository
1 CDROM/DVD
2 DEPOT
Insert choice and press [Enter]:

[Enter]

Update Platform from CD/DVD


1)

Reply the previous question by entering 1 [Enter]:


Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1 [Enter]
N.B.

2)

In this case must be available all the CDs set.

The procedure asks you to enter the CD driver file name, usually the proposed default is correct.
Enter q to Quit or the CD device [def=/dev/dsk/c2t2d0]:

Update Platform from Network Depot


1)

Reply the previous question by entering 2 [Enter]:


Insert choice and press [Enter]: 2 [Enter]
N.B.

c)

.In this case must be available a DEPOT already updated to P05.

The procedure will check the amount of free space on the file system, and enlarge them when needed. If any enlarged file system is in use, the extension can not be complete, a reboot will be required
by issuing the following message:
N.B.

The file system extension can ask for new hard disk, refer to paragraph 3.2.2.1.12.1
Disk Mirror Configuration Policy at page 50 the rule for the hard disk choice.
___________________________________________________________________
System need reboot x complete extension of file system current ...
___________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

d)

If one or more file system will require the system reboot the following message will be displayed:
ATTENTION
Upgrade OSConf install product(s) and/or Patch(es)
System could automaticaly reboot
All Application must be stopped (example: RM, NM, Resilience ec...)
Do you want continue ?
Press [y] for yes or [n] for no, then press [Enter]
Stop all the activity, if any, and reply with y[Enter].

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

59 / 178

The installation can be executed retrieving the software from a local CD or from a network depot. In case
you choose to install from depot you have to define a system with enough disk space available, where
two depots can be created, one for the third party software, that we will call OS_Conf Depot; where you
can store all the software layer distributed by OS_Conf itself, and one for the Alcatel TNM software, that
we will call Alcatel NMS Depot.
To setup the depot you need 2.3 Gbyte for OS_Conf Depot, while the size of Alcatel TNM depends by the
different NMS you plan to install.
The following paragraphs provide the instructions to create the depots.
3.3.3.1 Create OS_Conf Depot
OSConf Depot can be useful when you have to install more than one system, because it allows to execute
simultaneously and unattended installations. The detailed procedure to create the OS_Conf Depot (see
1350 Administration Guide [2] How to create a Network Depot).
3.3.3.2 Create Alcatel NMS Depot
This paragraph shows how to create the depot for Alcatel software. The depot size depends by the software you have to store on the disk, the Table 10. column Depot Package Size at page 149 summarizes
the space required in M bytes.
The following actions must be executed on the depot machine; preferably it should be a machine in the
network. It may be the same machine that you are installing, if you have sufficient free disks space.
You have to login to the alcatel depot machine as root user, and execute the following command:
1)

Extend /alcatel to allow the storage of Alcatel software by entering the command:
...,sys,root # scextendfs /alcatel/DEPOT <required disk size> [Enter]

2)

Change the default directory on the depot one:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/DEPOT [Enter]

3)

For each distribution CD Rom that contains the software you have to install:
a)
b)
c)

d)
e)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f)

ED

Insert the CD into the driver.


Check the CDROM type:
...,sys,root # fstyp /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> [Enter]
Mount the CD at /SD_CDROM directory:

if the CDROM type at point b ) is cdfs use:


...,sys,root # mount o rr /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter]

if the CDROM type at point b ) is hfs use:


...,sys,root # mount r /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter]
N.B. For more informations about the CDROM type, refer the Table 12. at page 150.
Copy the entire CD contents to /alcatel/DEPOT directory by entering the command:
...,sys,root # cp p /SD_CDROM/* /alcatel/DEPOT [Enter]
Dismount the CD:
...,sys,root # umount /SD_CDROM[Enter]
Remove the CD from the device.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

60 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.3 Create Depots

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.4 Before Starting


Before starting with the system predispose, it is advisable to have a clear picture of the software architecture; it is also advisable to prepare a schema of the system you are going to install. This allows you to prepare a list of materials and data that will be required during the installation.
The Alcatel network management system application architectures are generally provided with two functionalities:
a)

Master function

b)

Client function

The Master function provides the set of software programs that allows the machine to perform the network
management, and the Client function to provide the manmachine interface. The two functionalities can
be installed on the same system or on a different one. Where system navigation is foreseen, it is mandatory
to install the NMS Client on the system that has to perform the navigation. Just to clarify the concept look
at the following example: considering system with three machines, the first is installed with both 1354RM
Master and 1353NM clients, where two 1353NM instances have been created with the same identifier of
the two 1353NM master located on the other two systems. In this case it is possible to have 1353NM functionalities at 1354RM level (Navigation).
1353NM Master
1353NM
Client
1353NM
Instan. 2
Client
Instan. 3

1354RM
Master+
Client
Instan.1

1353NM
Master+
Client
Instan.2

OSKernel
1354RM Master with two 1353NM Clients

OSKernel

1353NM Master

1353NM
Master+
Client
Instan.3
OSKernel

Figure 7. Alcatel NMS Architecture.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Moreover some other software can be installed as component, they are qualified as NMC.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

61 / 178

3.3.4.1 Requested Data

a)

Which is/are the NMS you want to install ?

b)

Which is/are the NMS versions ?

c)

How many instances are foreseen ?

d)

Which is/are the instance identifiers ?

e)

Which is the size and role of the instances ?

f)

Is there any NMC to be installed?

g)

Is it foreseen the 1359HA OSCluster protection?

Fill in the lists of NMS and NMC in APPENDIX B at page 147 where all the foreseen items are shown.
3.3.5 PreInstallation Actions
Hereafter there are some actions that have to be done before installing.
3.3.5.1 Host declaration
The network node description have to be filled in manually, for each host you have to communicate to, you
must add a line with the IP Address followed by the host name in the /etc/hosts file (see Node Name Management paragraph 3.4 at page 88).
3.3.5.2 Authorize Network Loopback Access for CD/DVD installation
Even if the installation is performed locally there are some activities that need the network access to perform their tasks, this is the reason why, to be able to install from CD(or DVD), it is necessary to add a line
in the /.rhosts file (creating it when it doesnt t exist) with the local host name followed by root keyword.
3.3.5.3 Authorize the Retrieval from Depot Machine
This paragraph explains how to authorize the file retrieval from the depot machine, if you do not use any
depot machine skip it.
To be able to retrieve the Alcatel software packages from the depot machine, the access to these files have
to be granted to all the root users of all the machines that have to be installed. This can be obtained by
writing in the /.rhosts file the hostname and the keyword root for each machine, and add a line for each
of them in the /etc/hosts file.
Example: you have to install the following three systems: hosta, hostb and hostc (the depot machine itself).
You have to write /.rhosts this way:
hosta root
hostb root
hostc root
All the host included in .rhosts file have to be defined in /etc/hosts one.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

62 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

To be able to complete the installation you have to know in advance the answer to the following questions:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.6 Install NMS Description and NR7 Installation Procedure


Before starting with the NMS predispose action, you have to install the NR7 Installation Procedure and
NMS description. This can be done from CD/DVD or from network depot. The following paragraphs show
how to perform the activity from both sources.
3.3.6.1 Install NR7 Installation Procedure and NMS Description from medium
To install the NMS description and installation procedure from medium insert SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the driver and execute the following procedure:
a)
b)
c)
d)

e)
f)

Login the system as root user.


Mount the medium at /SD_CDROM directory:
...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM [Enter]
Install the NMS description by entering the command:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM/SWPDESCV7.4.0.5.sdpkg \* [Enter]
Install the Install_Wizard software from medium by entering the command:
...,sys,root # cd /SD_CDROM [Enter]
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_WizardR7.4.0P08 [Enter]
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_Wizard_CMDR7.4.0P15 [Enter]
Set the default directory as /, by entering the command:
...,sys,root # cd / [Enter]
Dismount the medium:
...,sys,root # umount /SD_CDROM [Enter[

3.3.6.2 Install NR7 Installation Procedure and NMS Description from Network Depot
To install NR7 installation procedure from network depot you have to execute the following procedure:
a)
b)

c)

d)

e)

Login the system as root user.


Install the Install_Wizard.sh software from depot machine:
...,sys,root # mkdir p /alcatel/DEPOT [Enter]
...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/DEPOT [Enter]
...,sys,root # rcp p <depot IP addr.>:/alcatel/DEPOT/Install_WizardR7.4* . [Enter]
...,sys,root # rcp p <depot IP addr.>:/alcatel/DEPOT/Install_Wizard_CMDR7.4.* . [Enter]
...,sys,root # rcp p <depot IP addr.>:/alcatel/DEPOT/SWPDESCV*.sdpkg . [Enter]
Install the Install_Wizard software entering the command:
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_WizardR7.4.0P8 [Enter]
...,sys,root # sh ./Install_Wizard_CMDR7.4.0P15 [Enter]
Remove the temporary file:
...,sys,root # rm /alcatel/DEPOT/Install_WizardR7.4.* [Enter]
...,sys,root # rm /alcatel/DEPOT/Install_Wizard_CMDR7.4.* [Enter]
Install the NMS description by entering the command:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /alcatel/DEPOT/SWPDESC7405.sdpkg \* [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

If the remote shell (remsh) fails with error: remshd: Login incorrect. check the
depot machine access authorization (see paragraph 3.3.5.3 at page 62)

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

63 / 178

The OSKernel modular approach allows to predispose the machine after the hpux Operating System
installation, this is performed on demand by a specific script. In this paragraph will be shown: how to predispose the system to be able to run OSKernel, because it has to be always installed. Then it will be provided
an example of 1353NM, and a generic example for all the other NMS.
3.3.7.1 Start the SWP Manager Script
To be able to start the SoftWare Package predispose script you have to login as root user and enter the
command:
...,sys,root # scmanageswp [Enter]
N.B.

VERY IMPORTANT: The whole installation has been described as a single predispose action. This means you have to predispose all the NMS and NMS instances in one shot. This
allows to save time and to do not meet problems in disk space computation. If you have
to interrupt the predisposal in the middle of the selection, exit the procedure choosing
Exit to abort the procedure itself.

The following menu will be shown on the screen:

SWP MAIN MENU


1
2
3
4
5
6
7
a
e

Predispose new SWP


View predisposed SWP
Remove SWP
Create new SWP INSTANCE
View created SWP INSTANCES
Remove SWP INSTANCES
Install 3PP Optional software
Apply
Exit

Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1


Select option 1 in order to predispose for a new SWP installation. First of all you have to predispose for
the OS_Kernel.
3.3.7.2 Predispose for OSKernel
First of all you have to predispose the system for OSKernel, in fact it has always to be installed as first.
The script proposes the capability to retrieve new SWP description files, enter: 3 [Enter] to keep the description installed at paragraph 3.3.6 at page 63.
Predispose new SWP
1 Install descriptions from DEPOT before to predispose
2 Predispose from descriptions installed on system
q Quit
Insert choice and press [Enter]: 2 [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Then the SWP description defined on system will be shown.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

64 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7 Predispose for Installation

Predispose new SWP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Item

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

SWP Name

1353NM
1353NM
1353SH
1354BMATM
1354BMETH
1354BMETH
1354BMPR
1354BMPR
1354QA
1354RM
1354RM
1354RM
1354RMPhM
1354SN
1354SY
1355VPN
1355VPN
1359HA_OSCLS

SWP Version

7.0
7.3
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.1
7.3
7.4
1.0
7.1
7.4
4.1
5.0
7.1

Press [Enter] to show other items ...


Predispose new SWP
Item SWP Name
SWP Version

19
1359HA_OSRES
7.1
20
OS_KERNEL
7.0
21
OS_KERNEL
7.1.2
22
OS_KERNEL
7.1.3
23
OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number: 24 [Enter]
Enter the OS_Kernel 7.1.4 item (23 in the example) to select it for the predisposition. The procedure
will ask you to confirm the choice.
Selected SWP OS_KERNEL 7.1.4
Please confirm your selection ? (y/n)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Confirm by entering: y [Enter]


All the layered software selected to the SWP predisposal will be shown:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

65 / 178

Analysing Product
Analysing Product
...
...
Analysing Product
Analysing Product
TRANSLATOR procedure

Product Name

Product Version

AlcatelOVDL
Apache20

2.1
2.0

unzip
xloadimage
was successful.

5.42.20010612
4.1

Press [Enter] to continue.


The OSKernel is now stored for the predisposal that will be done leaving the script.
3.3.7.3 Predispose for OSKernel Global Instance
Starting from NR7.4 OSKernel Global Instance have to be created with a specific predisposal action, that
means you have to drive back the scmanageswp tool to the SWP MAIN MENU entering q[Enter] two
time. Then enter 4[Enter] to select Create new SWP INSTANCE.
The following menu will be shown to you:
Create new INSTANCE
Item SWP Name
SWP Version Session

1
OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
YES
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :
Enter 1[Enter] to selcet the OSKERNEL, and the possible instance will be shown with:
List of available INSTANCE dimension for SWP: OS_KERNEL 7.1.4
Item

INSTANCE Dimension
INSTANCE Description

OSKERNEL
OSKernel Global Instance

Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :


Enter 1[Enter] to select the OSKERNEL the OSKernel Global Instance. Then the tool will ask you to
Enter the Instance Number for OSKERNEL , also if this value is not relevant we suggest you
to enter 1[Enter].
Reply with n[Enter] to the Do you like a MultiVolume group configuration ? (y/n),
and confirm you choice if the shown values are correct:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Selected INSTANCE:
Dimension
Number
MultiVolume

OSKERNEL
1
NO

Please confirm your selection ? (y/n)

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

66 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

TRANSLATOR procedure activated ...

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Confirm or refuse the selection. If you confirm the procedure will predispose for the installation of the required software:
TRANSLATOR procedure activated ...
Note: There arent kernel parameters defined.
Note: There arent additional components defined.
TRANSLATOR procedure was successful.
Press [Enter] to continue.
The procedure shows again the list of possible instance for the next choice, enter q [Enter] twice as
shown hereafter and proceed with the NMS predisposal.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

67 / 178

This section describes the 1353NM predisposal, it is provided to better clarify the procedure behavior, but
you have to execute it only if you need the 1353NM functionality, otherwise go to next paragraph Predispose for NMS 3.3.7.5 at page 75.
1353NM subsystems is organized in two components: the software code and instance. You have to predispose the software code once, but you can create one or more instances. Because of this there are two
different actions, where the second can be iterated more than once.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

IF YOUR INSTALLATION PLAN INCLUDES 1353SH BACKWARD COMPATIBILITY TOOL,


YOU HAVE TO INCLUDE 1353SH 7.0 ITEM IN THE PREDISPOSE ACTIVITY, DEFINING AN
INSTANCE FOR EACH 1353SH 5 or 1353SH 6 THAT HAVE TO BE MANAGED. THE
INSTANCE NUMBER MUST BE THE SAME OF RELATED 1353SH 5 OR 6.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

68 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.4 Predispose for 1353NM

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.4.1 Predispose for 1353NM Software


Proceeding in the script execution, after the OSKernel predisposal the script prompt you again for choosing the next software package, you have in any case to install something of 1353NM, so enter: 2[Enter]
to select the 1353NM 7.3.
Predispose new SWP
Item

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

SWP Name

1353NM
1353NM
1353SH
1354BMATM
1354BMETH
1354BMETH
1354BMPR
1354BMPR
1354QA
1354RM
1354RM
1354RM
1354RMPhM
1354SN
1354SY
1355VPN
1355VPN
1359HA_OSCLS

SWP Version

7.0
7.3
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.1
7.3
7.4
1.0
7.1
7.4
4.1
5.0
7.1

Press [Enter] to show other items ...


Predispose new SWP
Item SWP Name
SWP Version

19
1359HA_OSRES
7.1
20
OS_KERNEL
7.0
21
OS_KERNEL
7.1.2
22
OS_KERNEL
7.1.3
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :2 [Enter]
The selected product is shown to check the right choice:
Selected SWP 1353NM 7.3
Please confirm your selection ? (y/n)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

After the confirm action the procedure analyzes the description showing all the software layers required:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

69 / 178

Product Version

AlcatelOVDL
Apache20

2.1
2.0

xemacs
xloadimage
was successful.

21.1.14.20010612
4.1

Press [Enter] to continue.


Press [Enter] to proceed, then, exit to the Software predisposal by entering q[Enter] twice to came back
to the SWP MAIN MENU and be able to create the instance:
Predispose new SWP
Item

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

SWP Name

1353NM
1353SH
1354BMATM
1354BMETH
1354BMETH
1354BMPR
1354BMPR
1354QA
1354RM
1354RM
1354RM
1354RMPhM
1354SN
1354SY
1354SY
1355VPN
1355VPN
1359HA_OSCLS

SWP Version

7.0
7.0
7.1
7.1
7.3
7.1
7.2
7.2
7.1
7.3
7.4
1.0
7.1
7.0
7.4
4.1
5.0
7.1

Press [Enter] to show other items ...


Predispose new SWP

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Item

19
20
21
22

SWP Name

1359HA_OSRES
OS_KERNEL
OS_KERNEL
OS_KERNEL

SWP Version

7.1
7.0
7.1.2
7.1.3

Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number

q [Enter

The script will go back to the previous menu level:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

70 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Analysing Product
Analysing Product
.
.
.
Analysing Product
Analysing Product
TRANSLATOR procedure

Product Name

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Predispose new SWP

1 Install descriptions from DEPOT before to predispose


2 Predispose from descriptions installed on system
q Quit
Insert choice and press [Enter]: q[Enter]
Enter q again to go to the initial menu level.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

71 / 178

3.3.7.4.2 Predispose for 1353NM Instance

1)

Predispose for a 1353NM Information Manager (IM), if you want to install a 1353NM stand alone
or 1354RM cohosted system.

2)

Predispose for a 1353NM Spare IM, if you are installing the spare system in a 1359HA OSCluster environment.

3)

Predispose for a 1353NM Client, if you just want to have the 1353NM Presentation function on
any other NMS. In this case you have to create an instance for each 1353NM IM and the
Instance Identification number must be the same of the referred IM.

Here after the sequence of actions you have to perform to carry out the job.
At SWP MAIN MENU prompt you have to enter 4 to get in the Create new SWP INSTANCE:

1
2
4
5
7
a
e

SWP MAIN MENU

Predispose new SWP


View predisposed SWP
Create new SWP INSTANCE
View created SWP INSTANCE
Install 3PP Optional software
Apply
Exit

Insert choice and press [Enter]: 4 [Enter]


The already predisposed NMS will be shown in a list, enter the item of 1353NM (alias 1353SH):
Create new INSTANCE
Item

1
2

SWP Name

1353NM
OS_KERNEL

SWP Version

7.3
7.1.4

Session

YES
YES

Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number : 1 [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The list of the 1353NM possible instances foreseen for the specific machine model is provided.
List of available INSTANCE dimension for SWP: 1353NM 7.3
Item INSTANCE Dimension INSTANCE Description

1
1353NM_IM_Test
1353NM Master (IM) System Small Configuration
2
1353NM_IM_Small
1353NM Master (IM) System Small Configuration
3
1353NM_IM_Medium
1353NM Master (IM) System Medium Configuration
4
1353NM_IM_Large
1353NM Master (IM) System Large Configuration
5
1353NM_US
1353NM Client (US)
6
1353NM_IM_S_CLSSpare 1353NM Master (IM) Small System for OSCluster
7
1353NM_IM_M_CLSSpare 1353NM Master (IM) Medium System for OSClu...
8
1353NM_IM_L_CLSSpare 1353NM Master (IM) Large System for OSCluster
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

72 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The 1353NM Instance define the behavior of the application, you have three possibilities:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Before entering the instance item number for the selection, read carefully the meaningful of each item in
the following table:
Instance type item

Description

1353NM_IM_Test

Test instance, not useful for field deployment

1353NM_IM_Small

Entry level configuration

1353NM_IM_Medium

Middle range configuration

1353NM_IM_Large

High end configuration

1353NM_US

Client User Interface

1353NM_IM_S_CLSSpare

Entry level configuration for Spare system within 1359HA OSCluster

1353NM_IM_M_CLSSpare

Middle range configuration for Spare system within 1359HA OSCluster

1353NM_IM_L_CLSSpare

High end configuration for Spare system within 1359HA OSCluster

Table 4. 1353NM Instances


N.B.

The 1353NM_US instance is not defined for 1359HA OSCluster protection

The typical configurations are:

1353NM Information Manager

System is completely devoted to 1353NM function.

1353NM Presentation

System is completely devoted to 1353NM manmachine


interface.

1354RM Information Manager

The system performs the 1354RM function. The 1353NM


software can be installed to allow the 1354RM to communicate
and control the 1353NM. For each controlled 1353NM IM
system a related 1353NM Client (US) instance has
to be created. This 1353NM Client must be configured
with the same instance number identifier (ID) of the
controlled 1353NM IM.

1353NM/1354RM CoHosted

The 1353NM Information manager and 1354RM one on the


same machine.

1354BM Information Manager

The system performs the 1354BM function. The 1353NM


software can be installed to allow the 1354BM to
communicate and control the 1353NM.
For each controlled 1353NM IM system a related 1353NM
Client (US) instance has to be created. This 1353NM Client
must be configured with the same instance number
identifier (ID) of the controlled 1353NM IM.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enter the instance item number followed by [Enter] to make your choice.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

73 / 178

The master instance identifier has to be unique in the whole network.


The presentation instance identifier must be equal to the related master.
The spate instance identifier must be equal to the related master.
Insert the Instance Number for 1353NM_IM_Small:

The multiple volume group option is mandatory for the 1359HA OSCluster protected instances. You can
also choose to use the multiple volume group configuration without the 1359HA OSCluster, but you have
to devote specific hard disks for each new instance of data.
Do you like a MultiVolume group configuration ? (y/n)
After the volume group configuration, the procedure summarize the information asking you to confirm your
choice:
Selected INSTANCE:
Dimension
Number
MultiVolume

1353NM_IM_Small
3
NO

Please confirm your selection ? (y/n)


Confirm or refuse the selection. If you confirm the procedure will predispose for the installation of the required software:
TRANSLATOR procedure activated ...
Note: the volume group defined in the file /tmp/.scswpsession/.SWPDesc/1353NM/7.3/descriptor.cfg will not take in account,
because multi_volume_group option is not set.
Volume group vg00 will be used.

Analysing Product
Analysing Product
Analysing Product
TRANSLATOR procedure

Product Name

Product Version

DBDMySQL
DBI1.32
MySQL
was successful.

2.1026
1.32
3.23

Press [Enter] to continue.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If you have to create more than one instance, enter the item number of the menu that corresponds to the
type you want to create, enter the instance number and multiple volume option. Otherwise enter q [Enter]
to go back to the previous menu level.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

74 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

For each instance the procedure asks for two information: the instance number identifier and the multiple
volume group.
The instance number identifier have to be assigned following these rules:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.5 Predispose for other NMS/NMC


Any other NMS predisposal has a similar behavior, the only differences are related to the possible
instances available. This activity has to be performed only if you plan to have any other functionality on
the machine you are installing.
NMS has the same organization of 1353NM, software code and data areas; hereafter the predisposal
script behavior is shown.
3.3.7.5.1 Predispose for NMS Software
In both cases, if you have to start scmanageswp or proceeding from the 1353NM predisposal, you have
the SWP MAIN MENU on the screen, enter: 1 [Enter] to get on the next menu:

1
2
4
5
7
a
e

SWP MAIN MENU

Predispose new SWP


View predisposed SWP
Create new SWP INSTANCE
View created SWP INSTANCES
Install 3PP Optional software
Apply
Exit

Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1 [Enter]


The script proposes the capability to retrieve new SWP description files, enter: 2 [Enter] to skip it.
Predispose new SWP
1 Install descriptions from DEPOT before to predispose
2 Predispose from descriptions installed on system
q Quit
Insert choice and press [Enter]: 2 [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Then the remaining NMS descriptions will be shown.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

75 / 178

Predispose new SWP

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Item SWP Name


SWP Version

1
1353NM
7.0
2
1353NM
7.3
3
1353SH
7.0
4
1354BMATM
7.1
5
1354BMETH
7.1
6
1354BMETH
7.3
7
1354BMPR
7.1
8
1354BMPR
7.2
9
1354QA
7.2
10
1354RM
7.1
11
1354RM
7.3
12
1354RM
7.4
13
1354RMPhM
1.0
14
1354SN
7.1
15
1354SY
7.4
16
1355VPN
4.1
17
1355VPN
5.0
18
1359HA_OSCLS
7.1
Press [Enter] to show other items ...
Predispose new SWP
Item SWP Name
SWP Version

19
1359HA_OSRES
7.1
20
OS_KERNEL
7.0
21
OS_KERNEL
7.1.2
22
OS_KERNEL
7.1.3
23
OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number
:
Select a NMS of NR7.4 you want to predispose among: 1354BM ATM,1354BM ETH 7.3, 1354BM PR 7.2,
1354RM 7.4, 1354SY 7.4, 1355VPN 5.0 or 1359HA_OSRES 7.1. Enter the item number shown in the first
column of the menu, then press [Enter] :
N.B.

The item belonging to NR7.4 are shown in bold, do not choose the other ones.
To allow the correct behavior of 1359HA_OSRES with cohosted NMS refer to 1359HA
OSResilience Post Predisposal paragraph 3.3.8 at page 86.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If you predispose the system for 1359HA OSResilience you have to remind to predispose a 1359HA OSRES instance for each NMS subjected to protection (see Create
NMS instance paragraph 3.3.7.5.2 at page 78).
Then it asks you to confirm your choice, by showing you the selected NMS, enter y [Enter] if it is correct:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

76 / 178

Selected SWP <NMS name>

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Please confirm your selection ? (y/n) y[Enter]


The procedure start the description analysis issuing the following messages:
TRANSLATOR procedure activated ...
.
The output depends by the chosen NMS
.
TRANSLATOR procedure was successful.
Press [Enter] to continue.
Press [Enter] to proceed, then, exit from the Software predisposal by entering q [Enter] twice to come
back to the SWP MAIN MENU and be able to create the instance:
Predispose new SWP
Item SWP Name
SWP Version

.
The output depends by the chosen NMS
.
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :
Choose any other NMS you have to predispose, or enter q [Enter] to complete the NMS software selection. When you enter q [Enter] the procedure will show you the previous menu level.

Predispose new SWP

1 Install descriptions from DEPOT before to predispose


2 Predispose from descriptions installed on system
q Quit
Insert choice and press [Enter]: q [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enter q [Enter] again to go to the SWP MAIN MENU.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

77 / 178

3.3.7.5.2 Create NMS Instance

Check on NMS delivery notes if the NMS supports multiple instances.

N.B.

1
2
4
5
7
a
e

SWP MAIN MENU

Predispose new SWP


View predisposed SWP
Create new SWP INSTANCE
View created SWP INSTANCES
Install 3PP Optional software
Apply
Exit

Insert choice and press [Enter]: 4 [Enter]


The installed software list is shown, you have to choose the item related to the NMS you has predisposed
in the previous step (2 in the example):
Create new INSTANCE
Item

1
2
4

SWP Name
SWP Version

1353NM
7.3
YES
<NMS name>
<NMS version>
OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
YES

Session

YES

Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :


Select the item corresponding to the instance you want to create, enter it followed by [Enter]. The list of
allowed instances for that NMS will be shown.
For system with 1359HA OSResilience you have to predispose a 1359HA OSRES
instance for each NMS subjected to protection. Moreover the 1359HA OSRES instance
number can be arbitrary assigned, without relation with the protected NMS.
The procedure will ask you for two information: the instance number identifier and the multiple volume
group. The instance number identifier to be assigned has to be unique for that NMS in the whole network,
if you are creating a NMS Client the instance number has to be the same of the related master.
Enter the instance number followed by [Enter] to proceed:
Insert the Instance Number for <NMS Instance Type>:
The multiple volume group option is mandatory for the OSCluster protected instances. You can also
choose to use the multiple volume group configuration without the 1359HA OSCluster, but you have to
devote specific hard disks for each one.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Do you like a MultiVolume group configuration ? (y/n)

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

78 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This paragraph shows how to create a NMS instance for the specific data storage.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

After the volume group configuration, the procedure summarize the information asking you to confirm your
choice:
Selected INSTANCE:
Dimension
Number
MultiVolume

<NMS Instance Type>


<NMS Instance Identifier>
NO

Please confirm your selection ? (y/n)


Confirm or refute the selection. If you confirm the procedure will predispose for the installation of the eventual required software:
TRANSLATOR procedure activated ...
.
The output depends by the chosen NMS
.
TRANSLATOR procedure was successful.
Press [Enter] to continue.
The procedure shows again the list of possible instance for the next choice, enter q [Enter] to go back
to the previous menu level.
List of available INSTANCE dimension for SWP: 1354RM 7.4
Item

INSTANCE

Dimension

INSTANCE

Description


....
Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number : q [Enter]
Enter q [Enter] again to go back to SWP MAIN MENU.
Create new INSTANCE
Item

1
2

SWP Name

1353NM
<NMS name>

SWP Version

7.3
<NMS version>

Session

YES
YES

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enter q to Quit, d to Display again or the Item Number :

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

79 / 178

To speedup the predisposal execution and reduce the disk fragmentation, the predisposal is executed
when leaving the script. To execute the predisposal for all the software you have to exit the SWP MAIN
MENU by entering a[Enter]:

1
2
4
5
7
a
e

SWP MAIN MENU

Predispose new SWP


View predisposed SWP
Create new SWP INSTANCE
View create SWP INSTANCES
Install 3PP Optional software
Apply
Exit

Insert choice and press [Enter]: a [Enter]


All the item requested will be shown (example of a 1353NM and 1354RM cohosted)
Items SELECTED for the CONFIGURATION
Item Type

SWP
INSTANCE
SWP
INSTANCE

SWP Name SWP Version INSTANCE Number INSTANCE Dimension


Opt

OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
OS_KERNEL
7.1.4
1
OSKERNEL
<NMS name> <NMS ver.>
<NMS name> <NMS ver.>
n
<NMS name>_IM_Small

Enter a to Apply, c to Cancel or d to Display again:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Confirm your choice by entering a[Enter] (as apply) or cancel. Then procedure start executing the requested predispositions.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

80 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.6 Leave the Script and Execute the predisposal

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.6.1 Software Layer Installation Predisposal


Before start the procedure will ask you where to find all the software packages, by issuing the following
message:
SOFTWARE predisposition activated ...
Now you have to specify where are stored the LAYERED PRODUCTS.
Press [Enter] to continue.

LAYERED PRODUCTS Repository

1 CDROM or DVD media


2 Software Depot
q quit
Insert choice and press [Enter]:
You can choose between media or network depot, here only the network depot choice is shown.
3.3.7.6.1.1 Software Layer Installation Predisposal from Depot
Here the network depot choice is shown, enter 2[Enter], then the procedure requires you to specify the
depot, enter:
<depot hostname>:/alcatel/SCDEPOT[Enter]
Where you have to replace <depot hostname> with the name of the depot machine (see at paragraph
Create the Depot Machine 3.3.3 at page 60)

Depot specification for LP

Enter q to Quit or the path of the Depot: 192.202.21.8:/alcatel/SCDEPOT


Checking Depot presence ...
Predisposed installation for product: Perl5005_3
.
.
Predisposed installation for product: MySQL
SOFTWARE predisposition was successful.
Press [Enter] to continueu.
3.3.7.6.1.2 Software Layer Installation Predisposal from medium
Here the CD/DVD choice is shown, enter 1Enter], then the procedure requires you to specify the driver,
enter:
Device selection for LAYERED Products installation

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Enter q to Quit or the CD driver [default /dev/dsk/cxtxdx]:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

81 / 178

KERNEL configuration activated ...


This operation takes a while, please wait ...
KERNEL configuration was successful.l
3.3.7.6.3 Disk Configuration
Now the procedure check the space available inside the existing file systems and creates the new requested ones. The entire activity is carried out automatically, but not unattended. In fact there are two
cases where the operator attention is required.

File system busy

New hard disk allocation

3.3.7.6.3.1 File system Busy


The operator attention is required when predispose requires a file system extension and there are one or
more open files in it. In this case the file system is busy, and the extension it is not allowed.A message like
the following is issued.
___________________________________________________________________________
Analyze Mount Point:/opt
Request
Current
Current
Current

free:
size:
used:
free:

1072 MegaByte(s)
1536 MegaByte(s)
512 MegaByte(s)
960 MegaByte(s)

Evaluate size: 1792 MegaByte(s)


File System:/dev/vg00/lvol5 is busy, check process with pid(s):
1780
2070
1366
1758
1785
2069
2059
2067
2052
2096
3719
Press [T] for Try again, [A] for Abort, [R] for Reboot,then press [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When such a message occurs during the predispose, replay with R[Enter] to postpone the file system
extension to the next reboot.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

82 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.6.2 Kernel Configuration


The next execution phase regards the HPUX Kernel configuration. The kernel resources have to be
increased to allow the machine to run the application.
This phase does not require any human intervention.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.3.7.6.3.2 New Hard Disk Allocation


During the file system extension it may occur that the initial disk configuration it is not enough to store the
entire software, data and swap areas. In this case the procedure will require to add some more hard disk
to the system volume group. If the multiple volume group is requested at least one hard disk is requested
for each instance of software.
The procedure shows its execution trace (example):
DISKS configuration activated ...
____________________________________________________________________
Analize Mount Point:/alcatel/7.1
Request free MegaByte(s): 5800
Evaluate size MegaByte(s): 6848
Hardware detection in progress, please wait .......
....
Total disk(s) found = 6
Total CDRoms found = 1
Press [Enter] to continue....
When a new disk is requested, the procedure issues a menu with all the disks present in the configuration,
marking the unused disk with the label (free) in the Usage column.
N.B.

If you are implementing the disk mirroring, to reach the highest availability level, it is advisable
to choose a disk not connected to the same SCSI bus of the Main Boot Disk, this choice allow
the system to survive also to a SCSI bus failure.

N.B.

If you are implementing the disk mirroring, it is advisable to keep the two disk chains balanced.
If them are unbalanced the useful disk space amount is the minimum size of them.
If you are installing a machine in 1359HA OSCluster configuration some disk unused by
local system (free) can be used by another one, double check the configuration also of
the other systems!

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

_______________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
Mount Point need 5632 MBytes on Volume Group: /dev/vg00 (pvg0)
_______________________________________________________________________
Device MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
_______________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8680 0/0/1/1.2.0
Pri_Boot _Main_ vg00
c2t2d0
8680 0/0/2/0.2.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
D c4t8d0
8680 0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
D c4t9d0
8680 0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
c5t12d0
8680 0/7/0/0.12.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
c5t13d0
8680 0/7/0/0.13.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
_______________________________________________________________________
Select Data Area (Main instance) dev name or [q] to quit:
Enter the name of a free disk.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

83 / 178

Device MByte Hardware Path


Usage
Type
VolGroup
_______________________________________________________________________
c1t2d0
8680 0/0/1/1.2.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
c2t2d0
8680 0/0/2/0.2.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
D c4t8d0
8680 0/4/0/0.8.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
D c4t9d0
8680 0/4/0/0.9.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
c5t12d0
8680 0/7/0/0.12.0
Pri_Boot _Main_ vg00
c5t13d0
8680 0/7/0/0.13.0
__Data__ _Main_ vg00
_______________________________________________________________________
Confirm selection of device c5t13d0
Press [y] for yes, [n] for no or [q] to quit, then press [Enter]
After your confirmation, the disk contents will be irremediably lost!!
The script will require you to confirm your choice before use it, and the
Physical volume /dev/rdsk/c5t13d0 has been successfully created.
Volume group /dev/vg00 has been successfully extended.
Physical volume group pvg0 has been successfully extended.
.
.
Activate SWAP area /dev/vg00/lvol13 ...
______________________________________________________________________
System need reboot x complete extension of file system current in use
_______________________________________________________________________
DISKS configuration was successful..

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

It is possible that more than one disk is requested to reach the amount of disk required space. The expected disk amount depends by the number of NMS and NMS instances requested, its size can be computed following the instructions shown in the paragraph Requested Hard DIsks 2.1.1.4 at page 13.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

84 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

_______________________________________________________________________
Disks Selection
_______________________________________________________________________

3.3.7.6.4 Software Layer Installation

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The last message issued before starting the software package installation is:
ATTENTION: now to complete the configuration ShutdownReboot will be exe...
Press [Enter] to continue.
***** The System reboots automatically, please wait *****
Reply by pressing [Enter], the machine will be automatically rebooted and software components
installed. If you are installing with CD/DVD, the request of the medium will be issued in console issuing
a message that reports the medium label.
N.B.

Dont worry if the procedure does not require to insert all media, nether if it does not ask
media in ascending order.

3.3.7.6.5 End of Software Installation


When the installation will be completed on hp 9000 server console the following prompt will be shown:
The system is ready

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

GenericSysName [HP Release B.11.11] (see /etc/issue)


Console Login:
Instead on the hp 9000 workstation the CDE login screen will be shown.
Before proceed to the next activities you have to login hpux system check for any error occurred during
the predisposition. Usually a specific message (see paragraph 3.2.2.1.15) immediately advise you that
a fault is occurred, but it also useful verify the contents of file:
/SCINSTALL/scinstall.log

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

85 / 178

3.3.8 1359HA OSResilience Post Predisposal


Do not configure for OSResilience it is NOT YET AVAILABLE!!!!

When there are two or more cohosted NMS Master instances and the system has also the 1359HA OS
Resilience failure protection, some additional action are required after the system predisposal and
before customizing the software. In this conditions 1359HA OSResilience maximizes system performance allowing to use both master and spare servers for performing the normal operations, recovering
the faulty application on a single server.
The following figure shows how the 1359HA OSResilience manages these faulty conditions, it is important to note in the example how 1354RM is communicating with 1353NM in the two cases:

When both machine are operational, 1354RM and 1353NM communication occurs via 1353NM Client instance on board of 1354RM machine.

When one of the two systems is out of service, the communication are direct

The software component shown in Figure 8. in gray color are not operational, them can be the standby
instances created by 1359HA OSResilience.
Server hosta
1354RM
Master
Active
Normal system
Operation

1353NM Client
1353NM
Master
StandBy

Server hosta

System failure
example.

1354RM
Master
Active
1353NM Client
1353NM
Master
Active

Server hostb
1354RM
Master
StandBy
1353NM Client
1353NM
Master
Active

Server hostb

FAULT

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 8. 1359HA OSResilience communication example.


In this scenario 1353NM provide services to 1354RM through its client instance or directly, depending by
the situation. The same approach can be operated by 1354RM when cohosts with both1354BM ATM and
ETH.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

86 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Now you have to create manually the NMS Client to allow interNMS communication has shown in the
following paragraphs.
3.3.8.1 Manage 1353NM cohosted with any 1354 NMS
N.B.

Do not configure for OSResilience it is NOT YET AVAILABLE!!!!

When a 1353NM is cohosted with any 1354 NMS (1354RM, 1354BM ATM, and 1354BM ETH), you have
to create the NMS client data instance file system manually, by entering the following command:
...,sys, root # scextendfs /usr/Systems/1353NM_<NMS Instance>_7.3_Presentation 250[Enter]
Where;
<NMS Instance> has to be replaced by the NMS Instance identified associated to the 1353NM master.
3.3.8.2 Manage 1354RM cohosted with any 1354BM NMS
N.B.

Do not configure for OSResilience it is NOT YET AVAILABLE!!!!

When a 1354RM is cohosted with 1354BM ATM, and/OR 1354BM ETH, you have to create the NMS client
data instance file system manually, by entering the following command:
...,sys, root # scextendfs /usr/Systems/1354RM_<NMS Instance>_7.4_Presentation 400[Enter]
Where;

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

<NMS Instance> has to be replaced by the NMS Instance identified associated to the 1354RM master.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

87 / 178

This chapter shows the minimum operating system and platform configuration required to allow TMN machine interworking.
3.4.1 Node Name Management
Before proceeding in the installation and customization it is necessary to declare all the IP network nodes
involved. The involved nodes means all the IP are defined in the following table:
Description

Type
Alcatel TNM system

Any HP 9000 server and/or workstation with Alcatel TNM on board, that have
to communicate with the machine you are installing.

Printers

Any network printer that have to be used by the machine you are installing.

Virtual IP Address

Only for 1359HA OSCluster: the virtual IP address of the packages.

Time synchronization Any Time synchronization equipment reachable via IP network.


systems
Table 5. Involved IP Network Node table
For each machine that can be classify in the previous table, you have to check that a line exists in the file
/etc/hosts with Internet address and official host name (see hpux man page hosts for more information).
If the line exists check the data is corresponding with your addressing plan. If it doesnt exist you have to
add a new line with Internet address and official host name.
The official host name MUST be defined by using only alphabetic numbers and lower
case characters.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The /etc/hosts file must be manually updated each time a new machine will be installed.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

88 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.4 Operating System Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.4.1.1 Network configuration example.


This paragraph provides an example of a complex network management system, where there are five
servers working together. These are their roles in the TNM.

hosta
1354RM Client

hostb
1353NM Master

hostc
1354RM Client

hostd
1354RM Master

hoste
1353SH Master
There are other network equipments, such as rooters, printers (local and network), personal computer,
and time synchronization equipments. You have to identify the equipment specified by Table 5. at page
88, in the example:

gpsrec1 Time synchronization system via Global Position System.

lp1
Network line printer.

WAN

hosta
IP 192.200.49.1

gpsrec1 (GPS time receiver)


IP 192.202.21.51

lp1 (network printer)


192.202.22.6

WAN

hostb
IP 192.202.21.7

hostc
IP 192.202.21.8

hostd
IP 192.202.22.4

hoste
IP 192.202.22.5

Figure 9. Network Example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

In this example all the machines work together; you have to define their IP address and official host names
in the /etc/hosts of the five servers.
This is mandatory, because it allows the machines to communicate each other.
Supposing that GPS time synchronization system (gpsrec1) has to be used by the entire network management system, it has also to be defined into the /etc/hosts of all servers.
The network printer (lp1) can be defined only on the server on the same local area network.
hosta

hostb

hostc

hostd

hoste

192.200.49.1

hosta

Present

To insert

To insert

To insert

To insert

192.202.21.7

hostb

To insert

Present

To insert

To insert

To insert

192.202.21.8

hostc

To insert

To insert

Present

To insert

To insert

192.202.22.4

hostd

To insert

To insert

To insert

Present

To insert

192.202.22.5

hoste

To insert

To insert

To insert

To insert

Present

192.202.21.51

gpsrec1

To insert

To insert

To insert

To insert

To insert

192.202.22.6

lp1

To insert

To insert

Table 6. IP Network Description example.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

89 / 178

The clock synchronization is mandatory for system working together with Kerberos authentication tool, to do it the Network Timing Protocol (NTP) specified by RFC 1305 has to be configured by following the instructions shown in this paragraph.
If NTP is not configured you have to check the time difference among all the systems and
guarantee that it doesnt exceed five minutes.
Before proceeding with the NTP configuration you must have a clear picture of the configuration among
the involved machines, it is advisable to prepare a time distribution plan taking into account the following
rules:
a)

The primary time sources have to be reliable ones, such as a Global Position System (GPS) receiver
time source.
b ) Define two or three timeserver machines. Each timeserver should be a peer with of the other time
servers.
c ) If possible, do not synchronize multiple timeservers to the same outside source.
d ) If you choose to use an hp server as time source, it must be configured to be synchronized with
its internal clock.
For example in a network with two GPS receivers and five nodes, with the following roles:

host and hosted configured with: 1353NM and 1354RM cohosted with 1359HA OSResilience.

hostly, host and hostel preform the presentation function for the resilient servers.
The resilient hosts plus a presentation (host) can be configured to receive the time from the GPS receives,
and swap the time among themselves. All the other servers in the network (hostly and hostel) have to be
configured to receive the time from the host, host e hosted.

GPS

WAN

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

hosta
IP 192.200.49.1

GPS Receiver 1
IP 192.202.21.51

GPS Receiver 2
IP 192.202.22.20

WAN

hostb
IP 192.202.21.7

hostc
IP 192.202.21.8

hostd
IP 192.202.22.4

hoste
IP 192.202.22.5

Figure 10. NTP Configuration Example


To obtain such a configuration the three time servers you have to declare the two GSP Receivers as NTP
servers, moreover they can declare the other ones as peers; the resulting configuration will be:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

90 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.4.2 Synchronize the Clocks

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

hosta
server gpsrec1 prefer
server gpsrec2
peer hostc
peer hostd
hostc
server gpsrec1 prefer
server gpsrec2
peer hosta
peer hostd
hostd
server gpsrec1
server gpsrec2 prefer
peer hosta
peer hostc
The prefer attribute distinguishes as the preferred source, this source it is usually the most reliable and
also the nearest one.
The remaining servers can retrieve the time from the other ones, here after the configuration:
hosta
server hostb prefer
server hostc
server hostd
hoste
server hostb
server hostc
server hostd prefer
To make easier the NTP configuration the scxntp script is provided.
To start scxntp script, login the system as root user and enter: scxntp [Enter]
========================================================================
OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration
========================================================================
1 Add new NTP server
2 Add new NTP peer
3 Remove NTP server
4 Remove NTP peer
5 Configure NTP on local clock
6 Show NTP configuration
7 Show NTP status
8 Start/Stop NTP server
9 Align the time to server
e or q for exit

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Insert choice and press [Enter]:


To simplify the explanation, the procedure shows how to configure the server hostb and hosta of
Figure 10. at page 90. Note, the configuration order is relevant for the system behavior, it is better to start
configuring the nodes more close to the Timeservers.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

91 / 178

3.4.2.1 Configure hostb

a)

Login hostb as root user.

b)

Start the scxntp script by entering: scxntp [Enter]

c)

Define the preferred timeserver:


Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1
Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit : 192.202.21.51
NOTE: Checking the configuration ...
Would you like to set 192.202.21.51 as preferred (y/n) ? y
NOTE: Updating /etc/ntp.conf adding server 192.202.21.51 ...
NOTE: Setting 192.202.21.51 timeserver for synchronize at boot time
Press return to continue ...

d)

Define the secondary timeserver:


Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1
Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit : 192.202.22.20
NOTE: Checking the configuration ...
Would you like to set 192.202.22.20 as preferred (y/n) ? n
NOTE: Updating /etc/ntp.conf adding server 192.202.22.20 ...
Press return to continue ...

e)

For each peer hosts enter:


Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit : 192.202.21.8
NOTE: Checking the configuration ...
Would you like to set 192.202.21.8 as preferred (y/n) ? n
NOTE: Updating /etc/ntp.conf adding peer 192.202.21.8 ...
Press return to continue ...

f)

Start the NTP Daemon, setup the daemon automatic start at system startup, and synchronize the
hostb clock with the preferred server in one shot:
Insert choice and press [Enter]: 8
WARNING: The xntpd daemons it is not configure to start automat...
Would you like to start xntpd automatically at reboot (y/n) ? y
NTP server is stop
Would you like to start it (y/n) ?y
NOTE:
Temporary setup xntpd autostart...
NOTE:
Starting xntpd ...
4 Sep 18:33:01 ntpdate[14482]: step time server 151.98.45.29 offset 0.026898 sec
xntpd NOTE:
Reset the setup xntpd autostart...
Press return to continue ...

g)

Leave script by entering e or q.

3.4.2.1.1 Configure hosta

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

This is the procedure using scxntp script to configure the hosta of Figure 10. at page 90.
a)

Login hosta as root user.

b)

Start the scxntp script by entering: scxntp [Enter]

c)

Define the preferred timeserver:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

92 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This is the procedure using scxntp script to configure the hostb of Figure 10. at page 90.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1


Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit : 192.202.21.7
NOTE:
Checking the configuration ...
Would you like to set 192.202.21.51 as preferred (y/n) ? y
NOTE:
Updating /etc/ntp.conf adding server 192.202.21.51 ...
NOTE:
Setting 192.202.21.51 timeserver for synchronize at boot
time
Press return to continue ...
d)

Define the other two timeserver:


Insert choice and press [Enter]: 1
Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit : 192.202.21.8
NOTE:
Checking the configuration ...
Would you like to set 192.202.22.20 as preferred (y/n) ? n
NOTE:
Updating /etc/ntp.conf adding server 192.202.22.20 ...
Press return to continue ...

e)

Start the NTP Daemon, setup the daemon automatic start at system startup, and synchronize the
hosta clock with the preferred server in one shot:
Insert choice and press [Enter]: 8
WARNING: The xntpd daemons it is not configure to start automatically
Would you like to start xntpd automatically at reboot (y/n) ? y
NTP server is stop
Would you like to start it (y/n) ?y
NOTE:
Temporary setup xntpd autostart...
NOTE:
Starting xntpd ...
4 Sep 18:33:01 ntpdate[14482]: step time server 151.98.45.29 offset 0.026898 sec
xntpd NOTE:
Reset the setup xntpd autostart...
Press return to continue ...

f)

Leave script by entering e or q.

The script allows to easily manage the NTP configuration, you can add or/and delete servers and/or peers,
show the configuration, stop and start the NTP daemon, or align in one shot your system time to a specific
server.
Defining a NTP server the management script allows to specify the preferred one, it is not recommended
to define more than one preferred server.
The NTP mechanism takes a long time to synchronize the machine with server. The NTP
daemon has to be stopped and started each time the configuration changes. Usually the
NTP daemon is not running.
3.4.2.2 Initial Clock Alignment

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When a machine is installed for the first time, the clock is not synchronized with any reference, the easiest
way to synchronize it with the other is by running scxntp script selecting the option N.9 Align the time
to server.
The time alignment is forbidden when NTP daemon is running.

N.B.

To align the time you have to login the system as root user and start the script scxntp by entering:
...,sys,root# scxntp[Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

93 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

========================================================================
OSConf xntp Protocol Configuration
========================================================================
1 Add new NTP server
2 Add new NTP peer
3 Remove NTP server
4 Remove NTP peer
5 Configure NTP on local clock
6 Show NTP configuration
7 Show NTP status
8 Start/Stop NTP server
9 Align the time to server
e or q for exit
Insert choice and press [Enter]:
At the prompt enter 9 [Enter]
Enter server hostname or IP address or q for Quit :

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The procedure will ask you to enter the IP address or Hostname of the timeserver, enter it and press [Enter]
key. The time will be aligned and shown.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

94 / 178

3.4.3 Poseidon License Management Configuration

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Poseidon is the license software manager used to authorize the Alcatel Software execution.
N.B.

THE AUTHORIZATION LICENSE REQUEST CAN BE EXECUTED ONLY BY AUTHORIZED


ALCATEL PERSONAL.
The package foreseen to manage network floating license, that means you must define one or more system in your network to perform the license server task.

If you have three or more machines, you have to setup a Three Redundant License Servers configuration, in accordance with the following rules:.

The three license server machines should be located physically close to each other (if possible).

Never configure redundant servers with slow communications or dialup links.

The three server have to be reliable.


With threeserver redundancy, only one of the three servers is master, capable of issuing licenses.
Since all clients must contact the master, all clients must have reliable networking to a single node.

if in your network there are less than three nodes, you have to define a the license server, and all the
required licenses have to be loaded on that server.

The license have to be required providing the host identifier of the license server(s). Do not provide the
host identifier of the machine where the application is planned to be run.
3.4.3.1 Retrieve License Servers Host Identifier
When you have selected the license server machine(s), for each of them you have to retrieve the host
identifier by executing the following commands:
a)

Log in as root on the machine.

b)

Get the hostname of the current machine:


..,sys,root # uname n [Enter]

c)

Get the host identifier of the current machine:


..,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmhostid

[Enter]

Then fillin this one of these forms:


Table 7. Three Server Redundant License Form

Host Name

Host Identifier

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 8. Single License Form

Host Name

ED

Host Identifier

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

95 / 178

3.4.3.2 Require the Authorization License

3.4.3.3 Store the Authorization Key in the License File.


When you receive the license authorization key, you have to edit it by adding 27010 as port number at the
end of each SERVER line as show in the following example:
From:
SERVER host_c 839dc26
To:
SERVER host_c 839dc26 27010
Then store the resulting file in the following file of any machine that have to execute Alcatel TNM software:
/opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat
Then start the Poseidon software on it, by entering the command:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon stopEnter]
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon start[Enter]
Dont worry if no daemon is started on the machines that are license client.
3.4.3.4 Check the License Status
To check the license server availability and license status enter the command:
...,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmstat a c /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat[Enter]
Hereafter an example of the command output. It is divided in four sections: title, server status, vendor daemon status, and feature usage.
The title just shows the version of the license manager.
lmstat Copyright (c) 19892003 by Macrovision Corporation. All rig...
Flexible License Manager status on Tue 7/20/2004 18:15
The server status shows the license server names, which is the current license server master and
License server status: 27010@hosta,27010@hostc,27010@hostd
License file(s) on hosta: /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat:
hosta: license server UP (MASTER) v9.2
hostc: license server UP v9.2
hostd: license server UP v9.2
The vendor daemon show the status of the software used to control the license, it must contain alcatel:
Vendor daemon status (on hosta):
alcatel: UP v9.2
Then the feature usage list, with the list of all the authorized feature, and for each one of them the user,
the host and the start date of usage:
Feature usage info:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Users of 1353NM_POINT: (Uncounted, nodelocked)


alcatel hostb /dev/tty (v7.1) (hosta/27000 4406), start Tue 7/20 16:34

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

96 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The license can be require via Alcatel Intranet Web, by authorized Alcatel personal only.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.4.3.5 Add a New License


Sometimes in the system live it is necessary to increase the number of license. To add a new license on
a running license server machine without interrupt the serice, you have to proceed this way:
Do not mix permanent floating authorization key with demo one in the same file!
a)

Retrieve the new license key from Alcatel web, asking for the same host identifier of the first one.

b)

Login a Poseidon license server system.

c)

Save the current license file in a security copy by entering:


...,sys,root # cd /opt/poseidon/etc/ Enter]
...,sys,root # cp p license.dat license.save Enter]

d)

Add the INCREMENT line from the just obtained license file, to the /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat
file.
The INCREMENT line can be split in two or more ones, because of the length. If the INCREMENT line terminated with back slash ( \ ), that means also the next one have to be considered
as part of INCREMENT.

e)

If you have the three host redundant configuration, copy the license file on other two license servers.

f)

Force the license server daemon to reread the license file by entering:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon reread [Enter]

g)

Check again with lmstat (see paragraph 3.4.3.4) if the number of point has been increased.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

97 / 178

Some problem has been experienced configuring the three redundant Poseidon license servers. This
paragraph summarizes these problems and show a possible solution way.
3.4.3.6.1 Redundant Connectivity
The three redundant servers work properly only if each server is able to communicate with the other two.
This is the reason why it is better check the server configuration and connectivity. The easiest way to do
it is try a network ping from each license server to any other one:
..,sys,root # ping <Hostname> [Enter]
where <Hostname> is the name of the remote license server machine(s).

If the server replies the ping request an output like the following will be provided:
,sys,root # ping hostc 64 2
PING hostc: 64 byte packets
64 bytes from 192.202.21.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 192.202.21.8: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms
hostc PING Statistics
2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss
roundtrip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0

Otherwise, there is something wrong. From the error message issued by telnet you can have an idea
of the problem.

ping: Unknown host <Hostname>


Means the license serve <Hostname> is not defined in the host name repository, if you know
also license server IP address you can add it to the host name repository (see paragraph 3.4
at page 88 for more information). When the license server hostname will be present in the host
name repository retry ping command.

2 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss


If no one of the ping request is replayed, the are three know possibility:
a)
b)
c)

The remote server is down.


The remote server is not reachable because the IP address is wrong.
The remote server is not reachable because there is no known route on the network

First of all it is better to verify that the server is running. It the server is running check on the
/etc/hosts file if the IP address defined for the specified server is correct. If also the IP address
is correct, the reason can depend by the Default Gateway, check is adefault gateway si defined
and reachable. If you do not know name and IP address of the network default gateway refer
to the network administrator.
3.4.3.6.2 Two licence servers down

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The three redundant license server fails when more than two servers are down or are unreachabe, in order
to reduce the risk of license failure is suggested to peridiacally check the license servers entering:
...,sys,root # /opt/poseidon/bin/lmstat a c /opt/poseidon/etc/license.dat[Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

98 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.4.3.6 Poseidon License Server Troubleshooting

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5 Install and Customize Alcatel Software


Install and Customize Alcatel Software is the most important installation phase, when the entire Alcatel
Network Management software is copied from the distribution media to the installation target, and then
adapted to the target host by the customization phase.
3.5.1 Install and Customize OSKernel
The Alcatel OSKernel is the operational platform, so it must be the first software installed.
To install OSKernel Install.sh procedure requires:

The depot machine or distribution CD are available, and the local system is correctly authorized to access the files (see 3.3.5.2 and 3.3.5.3 at page 62 for more informations).

The installing system must be authorized to retrieve the files from itself or from depot machine.

When depot machine is used: The hostname of the depot machine correctly defined in the /etc/
hosts file.
N.B.

In order to prevent error messages during the OSKERNEL customize it is advisable to


configure the GoGlobalUX license as shown in 1350 Administration Guide [2] .
GoGlobalUX will be stopped by OSKERNEL configuration script. DO NOT start the
Install.sh with OSKERNEL option from any window open via GoGlobalUX, because all
the GoGlobalUX windows will be closed, and the configuration aborted!

If the mentioned requirement are matched, the installation and customization can be started by entering:
...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard [Enter]
For installation from CD:
1)

Insert the SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the CD/DVD driver.


N.B.

If a different media is present in the drive the installation can fail!

2)

Mount media at /SD_CDROM directory:


...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM [Enter]

3)

Start the installation script entering:


...,sys,root# ./Install.sh OSKERNEL cdrom [Enter]

4)

The script issues the following question to require you to confirm the CD driver:
Please enter the Device Name of source media [c0t0d0]:
You have to reply with [Enter] to confirm, or enter e different CD device file name.

For installation from Depot Machine:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1)

ED

Start the installation script entering:


...,sys,root# ./Install.sh OSKERNEL <hostname> <directory> [Enter]
Where:
<hostname> means the depot machine hostname
<directory>
means directory path on depot machine where depot is located.
(usually /alcatel/DEPOT)

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

99 / 178

For installation from Depot machine:


..........
........
......
....
..
XX
XX
XXXX
X X
XX XX
XXXXXX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XXXX
XX XX
XX
XX
XX
XX XX
XXXX

XX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XXXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXX

Installing OSKERNEL package


===========================================================================
LOADING: #################################################################.
The report shown in this paragraph is just an example.

N.B.

NOTE:
Preparing to install ...
NOTE:
Preparing to INSTALLER 7.1.3.1 ...
===========================================================================
Installation OSKERNEL package
===========================================================================
***************************************************************************
NOTE:
${INSTALL_ROOT}/INSTALLER/Install
OSKERNEL
${DEPOT_HOST}
file=${DEPOT
_PATH}/OSKERNEL_7.1.2.tar.gz interactive=no
NOTE:

09/26/05 14:11:35 Executing OSKERNEL install_cmd ...

***************************************************************************

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The installation is executed by INSTALLER that shows you the contents of the package :

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

100 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The script start issuing the following mask:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Install Tool: INSTALLER 7.1.3


[ Supporting NR7.1D ]

NOTE: NO CONFIGURATION provides by OSKERNEL for the package installation, using the default one .
Image Installation requested for:
Product
OSKERNEL
Format
zip
Host
151.98.42.32
File
/SD_CDROM//OSKERNEL_7.1.2.tar.gz
Keep_data
no
Check_sum
NOT APPLICABLE
Interactive
no
PLEASE ENSURE LOCAL OSKERNEL SYSTEM IS NOT RUNNING
.
The installation start automatically, this step will take up to 20 minutes.
The last question is related to the OSKernel customization; you have to reply also this question with
y[Enter]
Do you want to execute OSKERNEL Custom? [y|n|q] y [Enter]
Then the OSKernel customization will be executed showing the trace on the terminal.
*******************************************************************
NOTE:
${INSTALL_ROOT}/Kernel/script/KernelCustomize
NOTE:
...
.
.
.
NOTE:
NOTE:

Thu Feb 10 08:45:48 MET 2005 Executing

OSKERNEL custom_cmd

Reapplying PLT registrations.


Check GoGlobal 2 configuration ...

The procedure will stop after up to 12 minutes, asking you to authorize the GoGlobal UX environment
shutdown. Ask all users logged in with GoGlobal UX to log out the system.
GoGlobal 2 server will be stopped. Do you want continue ? (yes/no,
default=no)
Reply the question with yes[Enter] to allow GoGlobal UX customization, and then the procedure will
be completed in a couple of minutes issuing:
NOTE:
OSKERNEL installation completed
===================================================================
NOTE:
Session finished on: Mon Sep 26 14:38:37 METDST 2005

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The OSKernel installation and customization is now completed, before continue installation it is advisable
to check for any error that may have occurred by check the contents of the following file:
/alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installation_OSKERNEL_*.log

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

101 / 178

If you doesnt have already configure the GoGlobal License server, it could be displayed
an error message.
Dont care of it, and configure the GoGlobal License Server.
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

For installation from CD:


Dismount the CD by entering:
...,sys,root# umount /SD_CDROM[Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Remove the CD from the driver.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

102 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5.2 Install and Customize NMS and NMC


This section explains how to install and customize a the Network Management Subsystem and/or Network
Management Component.
Very important: For the first installation it is mandatory to install both the NMC and NMS software before customize NMS instance. For installation performed later please refer to chapter
4 Add New NMS/NMC at page 127.

N.B.

In the following table the NMS and NMC foreseen for NR7.4:
Name

Version

Description

1353NM(*)

7.3 (7.3.6)

Network Element Manager

1354BM ETH

7.3.0.5_ P02(RP10.1)

Broadband Ethernet Manager

1354BM PR

7.2 (7.2.4)

Broadband Packet Ring Manager

1354BM ATM

7.1.4 (RP003)

Broadband ATM Manager

1354RM

7.4 (7.4.3.2)

Regional Manager

1354SY

7.4 (7.4.0.2)

Synchronization Manager

1355VPN

5.0 (5.0.3B)

Virtual Private Network

1359HA OSReslience

7.1.1 (7.1.1 P03)

High Availability Operating System Resilience

1359IOO

5.2 (5.2.0.5)

Generic O.S. O.S. Interface

1359ISN

5.0 (5.0.0.5)

ISN Open Interface

ETHMEDIATOR

1.1.7.4.3

1354BM Ethernet to 1354RM Mediator Function

Table 9. NR7.4 NMS/NMC table

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(*) The installation of this item is better detailed in in paragraph 3.5.3 Install and Customize1353NM at
page 111.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

103 / 178

This paragraph shows how to install the Alcatel TNM software optimizing the time need to adapt it to this
specific environment.
To be able to curry out this section the following items are required:

A depot machine or CD distribution set available.

The installing system must be authorized to retrieve the files from itself or from the depot machine.

When depot machine is used: The hostname of the depot machine correctly defined in the /etc/
hosts file.

You have to be able to login the system via GUI, in case of HP server the GoGlobalUX have
to be authorized with the license code.
Then you can proceed with NMS and/or NMC shown at Table 9. as summarized hereafter:
a)

If ETHMEDIATOR installation is requested, perform the action shown at 3.5.2.1.1. at page 104

b)

Install all software on the system.


N.B.

ETHMEDIATOR must be installed after 1354RM!

c)

When ETHMEDIATOR is present, perform the action shown at 3.5.2.1.3 at page 106

d)

Customize all NMS.

e)

Customize all NMC.

f)

When ETHMEDIATOR is present, you have to customize 1354RM again .

Then complete the installation and customization with integrating the systems among themselves.
3.5.2.1.1 ETHMEDIATOR Preinstallation Special Instruction.
Meaningful for ETHMEDIATOR Only.
The 1354BM ETH Mediator has to be installed on 1354RM system Before installing the ETHMEDIATOR
it is necessary to stop any running NMS present on the system and OSKernel services. Shutdown the
NMS via Process Monitoring Control (PMC), and stop the OSKernel services by entering the following
as root user:
...,sys,root # /alcatel/kernel/scrip/KernelServices stop [Enter]
3.5.2.1.2 NMS or NMC Installation Procedure
If the mentioned requirement are matched, the installation and customization can be started by entering:
a)

Login the system via Graphical User interface CDE as root user.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

IF THE INSTALL NR7 IS STARTED FROM A SHELL WITHOUT A USEFUL DISPLAY


VARIABLE SET THE NMS CUSTOM WILL FAIL.

b)

Open a dtterm window.

c)

Entering the following commands at dtterm prompt:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

104 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5.2.1 Install NMS or NMC

For installation from CD:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1)
2)
3)
4)

5)

insert CD SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the CD/DVD driver.


N.B.
If a different media is present in the drive the installation can fail!
Mount the CD at /SD_CDROM directory:
...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter[
Start the installation script entering:
...,sys,root# ./Install.sh install <NMS/NMC name> cdrom [Enter]
The script issues the following question to require you to confirm the CD driver:
Please enter the Device Name of source media [c0t0d0]:
You have to reply with [Enter] to confirm, or enter e different CD device file name.
During the installation a message like this can be issued to advise you to replace the current
CD with another one, just replace the CD in the driver, the procedure will go on automatically.
Example:
PLEASE INSERT CDROM : SWP............ Vol ...

For installation from Depot Machine:


...,sys,root# ./Install.sh install <NMS/NMC name> <hostname> <directory>[Enter]
Where:
<NMS/NMC name>
NMS or NMC name (including ETHMEDIATOR).
<hostname>
means the depot machine hostname
<directory>
means directory path on depot machine where depot is located.
(usually /alcatel/DEPOT)
N.B.

To allow the recovery of errors it is possible to start install.sh with option confirm, the
option causes the issues of confirm request message before execute each step in the
installation and configuration. Replying no to these questions you can skip the step.

The script start issuing the Alcatel mask, then it will ask you some questions.
........
......
....
..
XX
XX
XXXX
X X
XX XX
XXXXXX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XXXX
XX XX
XX
XX
XX
XX XX
XXXX

XX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XXXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXX

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Installing <NMS/NMC name> package


===========================================================================

NOTE:
Preparing to install ...
.
The output depends by the chosen NMS or NMC
.
.
If you had started Install.sh with confirm option, you have to confirm by entering y [Enter]
The time spent for installation of package depends by NMS.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

105 / 178

The installation script can issues a message asking you for inserting a specific CDROM medium, just
replace CD in the driver with the requested one and the procedure will go on automatically.
Dismount the CD by entering:
...,sys,root# umount /SD_CDROM[Enter]
3.5.2.1.3 ETHMEDIATOR Postinstallation Special Instruction
Meaningful for ETHMEDIATOR Only.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

After ETHMEDIATOR installation you can startup again OSKernel services by entering
...,sys,root # /alcatel/kernel/scrip/KernelServices start [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

106 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

For installation from CD:

3.5.2.2 Customize NMS or NMC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Meaningful for NMS Only


Now customize the NMS instances created in the system predisposal. It is not necessary to customize the
NMC because them are automatically performed together NMS.
For each NMS instance execute the following command procedure:
...,sys,root# cd /alcatel//Install_Wizard [Enter]
...,sys,root# ./Install.sh custom <NMS/NMC name> [Enter]
Where: <NMS/NMC name>

has to be replaced by NMS or NMC name to be installed.


........
......
....
..

XX
XX
XXXX
X X
XX XX
XXXXXX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XXXX
XX XX
XX
XX
XX
XX XX
XXXX

XX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XXXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXX

Installing <NMS/NMC name> package


===========================================================================
LOADING: #################################################################
...
NOTE:
Check processes running ...
=========================================================================
Customization <NMS/NMC name> package
=========================================================================
NOTE:
Do you want to execute <NMS/NMC name> Custom? [y|n|q]
Reply y[Enter] to proceed in the NMS customization.
NOTE:
...
NOTE:

/alcatel/Kernel/script/Custom
/alcatel/Kernel/script/Custom

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The System, Instances,List window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds, it allows you to select the instance that you want customize:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

107 / 178

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Select Choose_one and then NewInstance , then select Apply & exit in the Actions menu.
Then custom Parameters Definition window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds, it allows
you to set the relevant custom variables:

Figure 12. NMS Customize Window

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

108 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 11. List of existing instances

To select the value for the following items you have to move the pointer on the box under the
label, then press the selection button of the mouse, a popup menu will be shown with the possible choices, moving the pointer choose one of them and release the mouse button: System_Version, System_Instance_Rule, Master Kernel_Type and Driver_Version.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

N.B.

To customize the 1354RM you have to set the System_Version on new NMS/NMC (including version),
then enter the Instance identification number defined at predisposal time (see Create NMS Instance
paragraph 3.3.7.5.2 at page 78) in the input area under the label System_Instance_Id.
If the Instance identification number does not correspond to the predisposed the customization script will create the data in a wrong place, and the /alcatel file system can get in
overflow.
Set the System_Instance_Rule depending by the rule of the specific instance identification number.
You have to set it to Master when the instance is an Information Manager (IM), Client when the instance
is a User Service (US). MasterClient has to be set only with1359HA OSResilience protection, when
a client file system has been manually created for 1353NM and 1354RM as shown in 1359HA OS_Resilience Post Predisposal 3.3.8 at page 86.
The input fields identified by System_Instance_Name allows to define the name of the system within
the TMNOS application.
For the Client instances it must be the same than the Master one. If you choose a name different
then the default customizing the master instance, dont you forget to enter it again for the client.
When you customize a NMS Client the related Master hostname have to be defined in
/etc/host file.
The Master_HostName is meningeal for Client and MasterClient instances. For the Client it must
be set with the hostname of the corresponding master instance, instead MasterClient is useful only for
1359HA OSResilience, and it must refer the companion hostname (refer 1359HA OSResilience 7.1
Administration Guide [12] for more information about companion concept).
For 1359HA OSCluster you have to specify the Virtual Hostname.
Leave Master_Kernel_Type and Driver_Version at default setting.
Then pulldown the menu Action (in the left upper corner), select Apply & exit to start the custom procedure.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A trace window will be open on the screen showing the customization progress.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

109 / 178

The procedure will complete when the [Dismiss] button will be enabled.
The NMS/NMC installation and customization is now completed, before continue installation it is advisable
to check for any error that may have occurred by check the contents of the following file:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

/alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installation_<NMS/NMC name>_*.log

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

110 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 13. NMS Customize trace window

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5.3 Install and Customize 1353NM


This chapter explains how to install and customize the 1353NM on the server. This activity is performed
by the Install.sh script, the distinction is introduced to better explain the actions required by 1353NM, in
fact this software can be installed with two different kind of clients. its own and another one to permit navigation to server with NR5 and NR6 1353SH.
This chapter shows in detail the 1353NM as example of an NMS installation and customization, because it is the most complex of them.
3.5.3.1 Install 1353NM
To install 1353NM Install.sh procedure requires:

A depot machine or distribution CD have to be available.

The installing system must be authorized to retrieve the files from itself or from the depot machine.

When installing from depot machine: The hostname of the depot machine correctly defined in
the /etc/hosts file.

You have to be able to login the system via GUI, in case of HP server the GoGlobalUX have
to be authorized with the license code(see 1350 Administration Guide [2] for more information).
If the mentioned requirement are matched, the installation and customization can be started by:
a)

Login the system via Graphical User Interface CDE as root user.
N.B.

1353NM CUSTOMIZATION WILL FAIL, IF THE INSTALL PROCEDURE IS STARTED


FROM A SHELL WHERE THE DISPLAY VARIABLE IS NOT SET.

b)

Open a dtterm window.

c)

Entering the following commands at dtterm prompt:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard [Enter]
For installation from CD:
1)
2)
3)
4)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

5)

insert the SWPNR74_ADD01 volume 1/3 in the CD/DVD driver.


N.B.
If a different media is present in the drive the installation can fail!
Mount the CD at /SD_CDROM directory:
...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter[
Start the installation script entering:
...,sys,root# ./Install.sh install 1353NM cdrom [Enter]
The script issues the following question to require you to confirm the CD driver:
Please enter the Device Name of source media [c0t0d0]:
You have to reply with [Enter] to confirm, or enter e different CD device file name.
During the installation a message like this can be issued to advise you to replace the current
CD with a new one, just replace the CD in the driver, the procedure will go on automatically:
PLEASE INSERT CDROM : SWP1353NM_APPV7....

For installation from Depot machine:


...,sys,root# ./Install.sh install 1353NM [Enter]
Where:
<hostname> means the depot machine hostname
<directory>
means directory path on depot machine where depot is located.
(usually /alcatel/DEPOT)

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

111 / 178

N.B.

d)

To allow the recovery of errors it is possible to start install with option confirm, the
option causes the issues of confirm request message before executing each step in the
installation and configuration. Replying no to these questions you can skip the step.

The script start issuing the Alcatel mask, then it will ask you some questions.
N.B.

The output provided are just an example of the procedure behavior. THE INSTALLATION CAN ISSUE DIFFERENT MESSAGES!
..........
........
......
....
..

XX
XX
XXXX
X X
XX XX
XXXXXX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XXXX
XX XX
XX
XX
XX
XX XX
XXXX

XX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XXXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXX

Installing 1353NM package


===========================================================================
LOADING: ##################################################################
NOTE:
Session started on: Thu Apr 20 14:30:40 METDST 2006
NOTE:
Setting language to: C.iso88591 ...
NOTE:
Check processes running ...
NOTE:
Preparing to install ...
===========================================================================
Installation 1353NM package
===========================================================================
***************************************************************************

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

NOTE:
${INSTALL_ROOT}/INSTALLER/Install 1353NM ${DEPOT_HOST} file=${DEPOT_PATH}/1353NM_736_CORE_20SEP2005.tar.gz interactive=no

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

112 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

For both installation methods:

3.5.3.1.1 Installing 1353NM Software

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Then the 1353NM distribution files will be insalled issiung a list of information like the following:
Image Installation requested for:
Product
Format
Host
File
Keep_data
Check_sum
Interactive

1353NM
zip
hosta
<file name>
no
NOT APPLICABLE
no

PLEASE ENSURE LOCAL 1353NM SYSTEM IS NOT RUNNING


....
....
....
If you had started Install.sh with confirm option, you have to confirm by entering yes [Enter]
The entire installation will require up to 80 minutes on a RP3410 server.
3.5.3.1.2 Installing 1353SH BKW NR5/6
When the 1353NM installation is completed, Install will prompt you the following question:
NOTE: Do you want
1353SH?[y|n|q]

to

execute

1353NM

Install

package

to

manage

NR5/6

1353SH 6.3 specific patch must be installed onto the 1353SH system to allow the integration with the 1354RM (see the 1353SH 5 and 1353SH 6 release notes).
If you have any NR5 or NR6 1353SH that have to provide the navigation feature from the installing system,
you have to reply with y [Enter] to this question.
N.B.

This package is significant only if you have predispose a 1354RM item too.

3.5.3.1.3 Automatic Post Installation Script Execution

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Some post installation activities are automatically executed before starting the 1353NM Custom.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

113 / 178

1353NM customization adapt software to the specific machine context, it is performed in two steps by
Install.sh script:

Precustom Activities

Custom.
To execute the 1353NM custom enter:
...,sys,root# ./Install.sh custom 1353NM [Enter]
The script start issuing the Alcatel mask, then it will execute the Precustom activities.
..........
........
......
....
..
XX
XX
XXXX
X X
XX XX
XXXXXX
XX
XX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XXXX
XX XX
XX
XX
XX
XX XX
XXXX

XX
XX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXXXX

XXXXXX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX

XXXXX
XX
XX
XXXX
XX
XX
XXXXX

XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XX
XXXX

Customization 1353NM package


===========================================================================
LOADING:
######################################################################
NOTE:
Session started on: Tue Jul 19 15:11:54 METDST 2005
NOTE:
Setting language to: C.iso88591 ...
NOTE:
Check processes running ...
===========================================================================
Customization 1353NM package
===========================================================================
Reply y [Enter] the following question issued by Install.sh:
Do you want to execute 1353NM Custom ? [y|n] y [Enter]
The procedure starts tracing the custom execution:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

======================================================================
NOTE:
Executing 1353NM custom_cmd...
NOTE:
runing </alcatel/Kernel/script/Custom>
NOTE:
Executing 1353NM custom_cmd ...
NOTE:
Basic Kernel Services (Connection Manager, Action Polling) Running. ..........
.
The System, Instances,List window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds. It allows you to
select the instance that you want customize:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

114 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5.3.2 Customize 1353NM

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 14. List of existing instances


You have to chhose the instance you want to customize:

if you are performing an installation from scratch: select Choose_one and then NewInstance to
define and customize 1353NM7.0.

if you are performing an upgrade: select Choose_one and then the instance you are upgrading,
identified during the software upgrade procedure.

Then select Apply & exit in the Actions menu.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The custom Parameters Definition window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds, it allows you
to set the relevant custom variables:

Figure 15. 1353NM Customize Window

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

115 / 178

To customize the 1353NM you have to set the System_Version on 1353NM7.0, then enter the Instance
identification number defined at predisposal time (see Predispose 135NM Instance paragraph 3.3.7.4.2
at page 72) in the input area under the label System_Instance_Id.
If the Instance identification number does not correspond to the predisposed one, the
customization script will create the data in a wrong place, and the /usr file system can get
in overflow.
Set the System_Instance_Rule depending by the rule of the specific instance identification number.
You have to set it to Master when the instance is an Information Manager (IM), Client when the instance
is a User Service (US). MasterClient has to be set only with1359HA OSResilience protection, when
a client file system has been manually created for 1353NM as shown in 1359HA OS_Resilience Post Predisposal 3.3.8 at page 86.
When you customize a 1353NM Client the related Master hostname have to be defined in
/etc/host file.
The Client Instance Identifier must be equal to the related Master!
The input fields identified by System_Instance_Name allows to define the name of the system within
the TMNOS application.
N.B.

Do not supply the hostname as System_Instance_Name


For the Client instances System_Instance_name MUST be the same than the Master
one. If you choose a name different than the default for the master instance, dont forget
to enter it again for the client.

The Master_HostName is meningeal for Client and MasterClient instances. For the Client it must
be set with the hostname of the corresponding master instance, instead MasterClient is useful only for
1359HA OSResilience, and it must refer the companion hostname (refer 1359HA OSResilience 7.1Administration Guide [12] for more information about companion concept).
For 1359HA OSCluster you have to specify the Virtual Hostname.
The System_Instance_Name and Master_HostName must be different.
Leave Master_Kernel_Type and Driver_Version at default setting.
Then pulldown the menu Action (in the left upper corner), select Apply & exit to start the customizing
procedure.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

A trace window will be open on the screen showing the customization progress.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

116 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

To select the value for the following items you have to move the pointer on the box under the
label, then press the selection button of the mouse, a popup menu will be shown with the possible choices, moving the pointer choose one of them and release the mouse button: System_Version, System_Instance_Rule, Master Kernel_Type and Driver_Version.

N.B.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 16. 1353NM Customize Trace


The 1353NM Custom script will show the Custom Product Selection 1353NM <instance number> window. This window allows to reduce the time spent to perform the custom by specifying a subset of the Network Element, but the Element Managers of the Network Element families not configured can not be used
in the 1353NM. If you want to configure all the Element Managers simply leave the CUST_TYPE equal
to FULL, otherwise change it to PARTIAL, and select in the list the Network Element family you want
to configure.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 17. 1353NM Custom Product Selection N.1

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

117 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 18. 1353NM Custom Product Selection N.2


Then pulldown the menu Action (in the left upper corner), select Apply & exit to start the customizing
procedure.
Please, ignore the warning messages shown in the following picture.

Figure 19. 1353NM Custom Warning

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

There are also some error messages that can rise that have also to be ignored, hereafter an example of
them:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

118 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

NOTE:
Importing EmlUsm.....import definitions ...
Importing from file:/usr/Systems/1353NM_.../SEC/repository/secimim...
ERROR: , line #494: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #499: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #577: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #582: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #1069: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #1074: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #1578: Name Already Used.
ERROR: , line #1583: Name Already Used.
Import problem: Name Already Used.
The procedure will complete its task in about 60 minutes on a RP3410 server.
If your planning foresees more than one 1353NM Retix Stack, it is suggested to configure
now all the lan cards needed with an IP Address (see 1350 Administration Guide [2] for
more information).
The 1353NM installation and customization is now completed, before continue installation it is advisable
to check for any error that may have occurred by check the contents of the following file:
/alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installation_1353NM_*.log
/alcatel/Kernel/maintenance/trace/Custom.trace
/alcatel/Kernel/maintenance/log/Custom.log
For installation from CD:
1)

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

2)

ED

Dismount the CD by entering:


...,sys,root# umount /SD_CDROM[Enter]
Remove the CD from the driver.

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

119 / 178

The 1353NM foresees to have more than one client instance on board of 1354RM, the reason is: the
1354RM must have a 1353NM client for each 1353NM Master it has to supervise. In this case you have
to install the 1353NM software once and customize any predisposed instance. The Install.sh allows to
custom the first one, if you have more than one, you have to start the OSKernel Custom procedure for
each one of the instance but the first.
To run OSKernel Custom procedure:

Login the system as root with CDE GUI.

Open a graphical terminal .


A window like Figure 15. will be open, enter next instance identification data as shown in the paragraph
Customize 1353NM 3.5.3.2 at page 114, and proceed customizing the next 1353NM.
Execute the Custom for all instances.

Enter the commands:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard[Enter]
...,sys,root # ./Install.sh custom 1353NM [Enter]

3.5.3.4 Customize 1353SH BacKWard Compatibility Tool


The 1353SHBKW tool is useful to perform navigation from NR7.0 Network Managers (1354) on NR5 or
NR6 Element Managers. It is an optional package installed together 1353NM replying y[Enter] to the following question also shown at paragraph 3.5.3.1.2Installing 1353SH BKW NR5/6 at page 113:
NOTE:
Do you want to execute 1353NM Install package to manage NR5/6
1353SH? [y|n|q]
The 1353SH BKW need some data to be able to perform its tasks, this data have to be created as a
1353SH 7.0 instances, this argument had been already introduced during 1353NM predisposal at paragraph 3.3.7.4 page 68. For each the created 1353SH 7.0 instance you have to perform the data custom
script as shown in this paragraph:
To run OSKernel Custom procedure:

Login the system as root with CDE GUI.

Open a graphical terminal .

Enter the commands:


...,sys,root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard[Enter]
...,sys,root # ./Install.sh custom 1353NM [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The System, Instances,List window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds, it allows you to select the instance that you want customize:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

120 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.5.3.3 How to Proceed with More Than One 1353NM Instance

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 20. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom System Selection.


Select Choose_one and then NewInstance, then select Apply &exit in the Actions menu.
The custom Parameters Definition window will be shown on the screen after a few seconds, it allows you
to set the relevant custom variables:

Figure 21. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom Parameters Setup.


To select the value for the following items you have to move the pointer on the box under the
label, then press the selection button of the mouse, a popup menu will be shown with the possible choices, moving the pointer choose one of them and release the mouse button: System_Version, System_Instance_Rule, Master Kernel_Type and Driver_Version.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

To customize the 1353NM you have to set the System_Version on 1353SH7.0, then enter the Instance
identification number defined at predisposal time (see Predispose 135NM Instance paragraph 3.3.7.4.2
at page 72) in the input area under the label System_Instance_Id.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

121 / 178

Set the System_Instance_Rule depending by the rule of the specific instance identification number.
You have to set it to Client .
The input fields identified by System_Instance_Name allows to define the name of the system within
the TMNOS application.
N.B.

The System_Instance_Name must not be equal to the hostname.


The System_Instance_Name must be the same than the 1353SH 5 or 6 Master one.
The Master_HostName must be specified, and it must be declared in /etc/hosts file, and the
host have to be reachable.
The System_Instance_Name and Master_HostName must be different.
Set the Master_Kernel_Type to EXTERNAL and Driver_Version at default setting.

Then pulldown the menu Action (in the left upper corner), select Apply & exit to start the customizing
procedure.
A trace window will be open on the screen showing the customization progress.

Figure 22. 1353SHBKW 7.0 Custom Execution window.


The procedure will complete its task in about 10 minutes on a L1000 server, issuing some foreseen warning messages shown in the Figure 22. Please ignore them.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The 1353SH installation and customization is now completed, before continue installation it is advisable
to check for any error that may have occurred by check the contents of the following file:
/alcatel/Kernel/maintenance/trace/Custom.trace
/alcatel/Kernel/maintenance/log/Custom.log

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

122 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

If the Instance identification number does not correspond to the predisposed the customization script will create the data in a wrong place, and the /usr file system can get in
overflow.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.6 FINAL INTEGRATION


Now the installation is completed, but the installed NMS still need to be configured to be able to start, the
activity is performed by System Configuration tool of each application, because this you have to refer
to the Administration Guide of each NMS installed to know how to perform the specific NMS process configuration.
N.B.

1359HA OSResilience requires its own system configuration, refer to 1359HA OSResilience 7.1 Administration Guide [12] for more information.

VERY IMPORTANT!!
When all the TNM machines have been configured in standalone, you have to run on
each one of them the final integration script!

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

123 / 178

3.6.1 Final Integration Script

1)

Before start, you must be sure that all systems involved are already installed, customized and
configured by system configuration tool. To easy identify the potential involved system opening
the TMN OS tool available on display front panel of any Alcatel NMS operator session.

2)

Login as root user.

3)

Start the global integration script by entering /alcatel/Kernel/script/UpdateNetworkConnections.pl and answer to the questions:
...,sys,root # /alcatel/Kernel/script/UpdateNetworkConnections.pl [Enter]

The procedure starts tracing the integration execution issuing an output like the following:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
NOTE:
...
...

Started in Interactive mode on ALL TMN Systems locally defined


Updating Required Client Instances...
Starting Required InterSystem Integrations...
1353NM_1: No Integratable System defined. Skipping 1353NM_1.
1354RM_3: Detected the following integrated Systems: 1353NM_1
1354RM_3: 1353NM_1 Already integrated. ReApplying Integration.

For each system that have to be integrated the following question can be issued:
1354RM_3: Run the Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
If you reply y the system will be integrated, and the procedure will issue also these other questions:
1354RM_3: Run the PLT Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
1354RM_3: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of [y/n]
1354RM_3: Run the Navigation Integration of 1353NM_1? [y/n]
Generally you have to reply y to all of them, with the following excepion, when procedure asks you to
authorize the integration between a 1354RM and 1354BM ETH, where you MUST reply NO to PLT
and Backup/Restore integration, like the following example:
1354RM_3: Run the PLT Integration of 1354BMPR_1? [y/n] n
1354RM_3: Run the Backup/Restore Integration of 1354BMPR_1 [y/n] n
1354RM_3: Run the Navigation Integration of 1354BMPR_1? [y/n] y
Warning and error messages will advice you that the remote system is not reachable or not properly configured, and the machine will be not integrated. If such kind of message are issued, identify the problem, fix
it, and run again the integration script.
Example:
WARNING: 1353RM_3: Connection problems with <hostname>. Skipping Update.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When the procedure will be successfully executed, you will be able to use all the Network Management
System features.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

124 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

On each just installed machine:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

3.6.2 Alarm Surveillance Federation


The Alarm Surveillance federation is an OSKernel optional feature that allows to see the alarms of all
NMS client installed on system in a single Alarm Surveillance graphical interface.
To be able to perform the AS federation you must have two or more NMS Client and/or Master instances.
The command syntax is:
ASUSMFederation.pl name <ASFN> [sec <Sec Inst>] <NMS Inst List>
Where:
name <ASFN>

Specifies the AS Federation Name, that will be shown by TMN OS tool


and AS USM Window title.
N.B.

No special characters are allowed in the AS USM Window title.

s <Sec Inst> (optional) This option allows to specify the NMS instance will be referred by ASUSM
for granting network object access permission (SEC). This feature was
mandatory untill NR7.1T, when AS did not support the multiple SEC. With
NR7.1D/7.2 specifying this option you force AS to refer just one SEC, reducing the AS federation access authorization to the operators defined in
the indicated NMS instance.
<NMS Inst List>

Specifies the NMS instance list that will be part of federation. with the
followong syntax:
<NMS_NAME>_<NMS_INSTANCE><NMS_VERSION>
Example:
1354RM_27.1

You can create different AS Federations, by running the command with different ASF names.
The command must be executed by root user, and the file is located in /usr/Systems/Global_Instance/
AS/script/, so to start the command you have to logging the system as root and enter:
...,sys,root # /usr/Systems/Global_Instance/AS/script/ASUSMFederation.pl \[Enter]
name <ASF Name> <NMS Instance List>[Enter]
This is an example of two AS federation performed on a system equipped with: 1354RM Master instance
number 2, three 1353NM Client instance number 1, 2 and 3. The latter will be call RegionEst involving
the 1354RM and 1353NM instance number 1, and the former will be call RegionWest involving the
1354RM and 1353NM instance number 2 and 3.
...,sys,root # /usr/Systems/Global_Instance/AS/script/ASUSMFederation.pl \[Enter]
name RegionEst 1354RM_27.1 1353NM_17.0 [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

...,sys,root # /usr/Systems/Global_Instance/AS/script/ASUSMFederation.pl \[Enter]


name RegionWest 1354RM_27.1 1353NM_27.0 1353NM_37.0 [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

125 / 178

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

02

3AL 88924 BAAA

178

126 / 178
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4 ADD NEW NMS/NMC


This chapter describes how to add a new NMS, a new NMC or a new NMS instance to an existing Alcatel
TMN system.

4.1 Prerequisites
Before proceed in new software installation can be operate only if the prerequisite shown in this paragraph
are met. The prerequisite evaluation is require to do not compromise an existing system with an incompatible software or simply get in trouble during the installation.
4.1.1 Previous installation status.
The entire installation process is based in two step, predisposal and installation. These two actions must
be execute in the order, when the machine is predisposed for a specific software, this software have to
be installed before proceed with a new predispose action. If this sequence is not respected, the installation
process is not guarantee. That means, before proceed in the predisposal for the new NMS or NMC, you
have to check that there are no predisposed NMS and NMC not yet installed. If any of them is present,
please install them or delete the related Software Package (SWP) predisposal with scmanageswp tool.
4.1.2 Network Release Compatibility
You can install any NMS or NMC of the same Network Release level.
For installation of NMS of different network release refer to the specific release notes.
4.1.3 Disk space requirements
Disk space requirements are specified in paragraph B.3 at page 149.
4.1.4 Reboot Planning

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The installation of a new NMS or a new NMS instance creation requires the system reboot, the only exception to this role is 1353NM client, that means before start the system predispose you have to plan a system
reboot.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

127 / 178

This paragraph describes which paragraphs of the previous chapters you have to follow to install a new
NMS on an existing TMN machine.
The 1359HA OSResilience NMC has specific instructions
a)

Predispose the system for both software package and instance for new NMS/NMC using scmanageswp tool has shown in paragraph: Start SWP Management Script 3.3.7.1 at page 64, when
needed Predispose for 1353NM 3.3.7.4 at page 68, and Predispose for other NMS/NMC 3.3.7.5
at page 75.
The system predispose can require the reboot of hpux.

N.B.
b)

Add the NMS/NMC related license in the Poseidon license file of the license server machine.

c)

Force the license server machine to load the new license by entering the following command on one
of them:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/poseidon reread [Enter]

d)

Install the Alcatel software following instruction shown in paragraphs: Install NMS and NMC 3.5.2.1
at page 104.

e)

Execute the custom for each NMS instance and/or for each NMC just installed following paragraph
Customize NMS Instance or NMC 4.2.1 at page 128.

f)

Then proceed in the process configuration as described in the specific administration guide.

g)

Perform the TMN system Final Integration shown in the paragraph 3.6 at page 123.

4.2.1 Customize NMS Instance or NMC


The customization of additional software instances or optional components on operational system are
risky actions, because mistake can compromise running processes, for this reason the procedure has to
follow with the maximum attention.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Within the additional software and instances it is possible to distinguish three different cases:

ED

1)

Customize a new just created NMS instance.

2)

Customize 1354RM to integrate ETHMediator.

3)

NMS upgrade instance for 1359IOO and 1359ISN

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

128 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4.2 Install a new NMS/NMC

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4.2.1.1 Customize NMS Instance


This activity can be carried on without interference with other NMS on the system, just following this instruction shown in Customize NMS paragraph 3.5.2.2 at page 107.
4.2.1.2 Customize 1354RM to integrate ETHMediator.
When you install the ETHMediator function on a system where the 1354RM Master is already present,
to integrate this new component you have to:
1)

Login system as 1354RM administrator and shutdown the application via PMC.

2)

Execute the application data backup of 1359ISN, when 1359ISN is present.

3)

Log out 1354RM administrator session, and login as root.

4)

Execute the 1354RM Master customizing following this instruction shown in Customize NMS
paragraph 3.5.2.2 at page 107.

5)

Log out root session, and login as 1354RM administrator.

6)

Restore 1359ISN saved data, when needed.

7)

Login system as 1354RM administrator and startup the application via PMC.

4.2.1.3 NMS upgrade instance for 1359IOO and 1359ISN


When 1359IOO and 1359ISN are installed on already operating system, it is required to update also the
NMS instances that have to be able to integrate these NMC, by executing this procedure:
1)

Login system as root.

2)

Enter the following commands:


...,sys, root # cd /alcatel/Install_Wizard[Enter]
...,sys, root # ./Install.sh custom <NMC Name>[Enter]

3)

Verify that no errors are displayed on standard output (warnings can be ignored).

4)

In case of errors, after upgrade instance completion, you can check the following trace files:
/alcatel/Install_Wizard/log/Installation_ <NMC Name>_#.log
/alcatel/Kernel/maintenance/trace/updateInstance.trace

This activity can be execute on a running system.


4.2.2 NMC Special Insertions
The Network Management Components has no instances, but they are plugged in existing NMS, this activity is automatically performed by NMS customization when the NMC is present on the installation tree, or
by Install.sh procedure specifying custom.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

4.2.2.1 For 1359ISN


1359ISN customize script revert the configuration data to the default ones, because this action can be executed automatically by 1354RM custom or system configuration, to prevent loosing any configuration
change, it is advisable to perform a 1359ISN data backup each time you change the data, to be able to
restore them in case of reset.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

129 / 178

The 1359HA OSResilience NMC installation on board of an existing NMS does not involve only the system itself, but it requires to operate on many machine, including the spare system that are specifically requested in addition.
First of all you have to draw a clear picture of starting and final configurations. Just to better understand
the sequence of activity we can considering a common network management configuration shown in
Figure 23.
hosta
1354RM Client
1353NM Client

hostb
1354RM Master

hostc
1353NM Master

1353NM Client

Figure 23. Add 1359HA OSResilience Starting configuration Example


The figure shows three machines working together, whit the clientmaster relationship shown by the arrows.
To be able to install and configure the 1359HA OSResilience you have to identify the machine that has
to be subjected to high availability protection, them will be defined as Network Operation Center (in the
example hostb and hostc), and presentation machines that do not require protection.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Starting from the network management shown in Figure 23. the suggested 1359HA OSResilience configuration is shown by Figure 24. The picture distinguishes among Network Operation Center, Disaster
Recovery Center, and machine that do not belong to them (presentation machines). The white arrows
shows the clientmaster relationship when the NOC is operational, the striped ones when the DRC takes
the control.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

130 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4.2.3 1359HA OSResilience Specific Instructions

hosta

hostb

1353NM Client

1359HA OSRes

1354RM Master

hostb1

hostc

1353NM Master

1359HA OSRes

Network Operation Centre

1353NM Client

hostc1

1359HA OSRes

1353NM Master

1354RM Master

1359HA OSRes

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1353NM Client

1359HA OSRes

1354RM Client

Disaster Recovery Centre

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 24. Add 1359HA OSResilience Final configuration Example

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

131 / 178

This paragraph provides the guidelines for installing 1359HA OSResilience on an existing TMN system
referring the previous example.
a)

Operate on DRC Machines:


1)

b)

Install and customize new DRC machines (hostb1 and hostc1) with the same configuration of
the related companions adding the 1359HA OSResilience function referring the installation
chapter of this document, operating like a new fresh installation.

Operate on NOC Machines, on each system proceed this way:


1)

Login the system as TMN administrator (alcatel user), and shut down the applications.

2)

Predispose the system for 1359HA_OSRES SWP and create a 1359HA OSRES IM instance
for each local NMS IM instance subjected to resilience protection, and 1359HA_OSRES US
instance for each client referring a resilient IM.

3)

Install 1359HA OSResilience following the instruction shown by paragraph Install NMS or
NMC 3.5.2.1 at page 104.

4)

Execute any foreseen precustomization actions for 1359HA OSResilience following the instruction of paragraph Customize NMS or NMC 3.5.2.2 at page 107, with the exception that
you have to reply no[Enter] at the custom execution question:
NOTE:
Do you want to execute <NMS/NMC name> Custom? [y|n|q]

5)

Depending by the NMS/NMC instance type present on the machine, execute the procedure described in one of the following paragraphs:
Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in distributed configuration.
Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in cohosted configuration.
Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in Presentation only configuration.

4.2.3.2 Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in distributed configuration.


This paragraph is applicable to Alcatel TMN system where there is just one NMS Master installed on the
system or 1354BM ATM and 1354BM ETH cohosted.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

For each NMS Master subjected to resilience protection:

ED

1)

Update instance data description including 1359HA OSResilience by entering:


...,sys,root # /alcatel/Kernel/script/updateInstance.pl \[Enter]
sys <NMS_SYSTEM> inst <NMS_INSTANCE> type NMC \[Enter]
comp OSRES skipconfig[Enter]

2)

Configure 1359HA OSResilience subsystem in the scope of instance process configuration


for each NMS IM subjected to resilience protection (refer to 1359HA OSResilience 7.1 Administration Guide [12] for more information).

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

132 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4.2.3.1 How to install 1359HA OSResilience

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

4.2.3.3 Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in cohosted configuration.


This paragraph is applicable to Alcatel TMN system where:

A 1353NM Master in installed with one of the following NMS Master: 1354RM, 1354BM ATM or
1354BM ETH

A 1354RM Master in installed with one of the following NMS Master: 1354BM ATM or 1354BM ETH
a)

For each 1354BM Master subjected to resilience protection, execute the procedure described at
paragraph 4.2.3.2 Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in distributed configuration .

b)

For each 1354RM Master subjected to resilience protection, when there is no 1354BM Master cohosted, execute the procedure described at paragraph 4.2.3.2 Customize and Configure 1359HA
OSResilience in distributed configuration .

c)

For each 1354RM Master subjected to resilience protection, when any 1354BM Master is cohosted,
execute the following procedure:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

d)

ED

1)

Create an additional 1354RM Client instance file system as shown at paragraph 3.3.8.2 Manage 1354RM cohosted with any 1354BM NMS at page 87.

2)

Customize again the 1354RM specifying Master_Client as System_Instance_Rule (see


3.5.2.2 at page 107 for more information).

3)

Configure 1359HA OSResilience subsystem in the scope of instance process configuration


for each NMS IM subjected to resilience protection (refer to 1359HA OSResilience 7.1 Administration Guide [12] for more information).

For each 1353NM Master subjected to resilience protection, when any 1354 Master is cohosted, execute the following procedure:
1)

Create an additional 1353NM Client instance file system as shown at paragraph 3.3.8.1 Manage 1353NM cohosted with any 1354 NMS at page 87.

2)

Customize again the 1353NM specifying Master_Client as System_Instance_Rule (see


at 3.5.3.2 page 114 for more information).

3)

Configure 1359HA OSResilience subsystem in the scope of instance process configuration


for each NMS IM subjected to resilience protection (refer to 1359HA OSResilience 7.1 Administration Guide [12] for more information).

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

133 / 178

4.2.3.4 Customize and Configure 1359HA OSResilience in Presentation only configuration.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

For each NMS Client referring a NMS Master subjected to resilience protection:

ED

1)

Update instance data description including 1359HA OSResilience by entering:


...,sys,root # /alcatel/Kernel/script/updateInstance.pl \[Enter]
sys <NMS_SYSTEM> inst <NMS_INSTANCE> type NMC \[Enter]
comp OSRES skipconfig[Enter]

2)

Configure the 1359HA OSResilience within the NMS instance by entering:


...,sys,root # /usr/System/<NMS Instance>/OSRES/etc/OSResSystemConfig [Enter]
Where:
<NMS Instance > has to be replace with the NMS instance root directory, that is defined by
the following information:
<NMS Name>_<NMS Instance ID><NMS Version>
Where:
<NMS Name>
means the NMS name (example: 1353NM).
<NMS Instance ID>
means the instance ID number.
<NMS Version>
means the NMS version (example: 7.0)
Example:
...,sys,root # /usr/System/1353NM_37.0/OSRES/etc/OSResSystemConfig [Enter]

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

134 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This paragraph is applicable to Alcatel TMN system where there is only NMS Client installed.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5 TROUBLESHOOTING
Here after is shown how to solve some trouble can occur during the installation, and how to proceed when
possible.

5.1 Identify a Failure Condition


Before proceed with the troubleshooting it is suggested to identify the problem. It also important to distinguish between messages issued during the normal behavior and real error messages.
These is a messages issued at login time to advise the operator that an installation activity is in progress:
********************* WAIT INSTALLATION IN PROGRESS *******************
Do not alter environment, check log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log
***************************************************************************
This is not an error message, it just advise you that an installation activity is in progress, in this case it is
better wait until the activity will be terminated.
The following message will be issued when an error is met during the automatic software installation.
**************** THIS SYSTEM IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED *****************
To fix the problem, check the log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log
***************************************************************************
Some system reboot are foreseen to correctly carry on the installation, that means dont worry
if the system reboot automatically.

N.B.

5.2 Failure installing a HPUX


HPUX Operating System is the first software installed, it is stored in some dump files automatically
restored by the installation procedure. A fault during the HPUX installation can not be recovered the
installation have to be started from the beginning.
The HPUX installation will be completed when the following message will be shown on the console:
******* The HPUX software has been successfully restored *******
But the error recovery will be possible only after the first reboot of the system performed just after the message:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

***** The System reboots automatically, please wait *****

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

135 / 178

5.3 Recoverable Faults

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.3.1 Recoverable Faults Installing Software


Recoverable are the faults occurred before the start of installation, or during the analysis.
An example is the following messages in the /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log file:
=======

08/05/03 16:41:44 METDST BEGIN swinstall SESSION


(noninteractive) (jobid=tlvhhx0027)
* Session started for user root@tlvhhx.

* Beginning Selection
tlvhhx:/: This target or source is already in use either
within this same session or by another session. A read or
write lock was denied.
* Target connection failed for tlvhhx:/.
ERROR:
More information may be found in the daemon logfile on this
target (default location is tlvhhx:/var/adm/sw/swagentd.log).
* Selection had errors.
ERROR:

=======

08/05/03 16:41:44 METDST END swinstall SESSION


(noninteractive) (jobid=tlvhhx0027)

EXIT CODE: 1
SCinstall: Error end SCINSTALL
In this case you have to identify the reason of the fault (example: cdrom switched of, action on the target
depot, etc.), remove it, then recover the fault trying to preform again the failed action following this procedure:

Logging the system as root user.

Change the default directory on /SCINSTALL/execution:


...,sys,root # cd /SCINSTALL/execution [Enter]

Locate the file *.in_progress and rename it removing extension .in_progress :


...,sys,root # ls *.in_progress [Enter]
...,sys,root # mv <file_name>.in_progress <file_name> [Enter]
for example:
...,sys,root # ls *.in_progress [Enter]
01001SC.SCstdinstall.in_progress
...,sys,root # mv 01001SC.SCstdinstall.in_progress 01001SC.SCstdinstall [Enter]

Reboot the system to allow the correct

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The procedure will try again the installation of the failed package.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

136 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.3.1.1 Failure in File System Extension


If an error occurs extending a file system, the installation is interrupted and the following message is issued
each time you login the system:
**************** THIS SYSTEM IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED *****************
Error during execution of scextendfs.reboot
To fix the problem, check the log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log
**************************************************************************
Look at the /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log file to know which is the meet problem and how to fix it before proceed.
When the error has been recovered remove the following files:

/SCINSTALL/scextendfs.error_msg to remove the message to remove the message at login time.

/SCINSTALL/data/scextendfs.env to prevent the extension retry at the next reboot.

/sbin/rc1.d/S099scextendfs.reboot to prevent the extension retry at the next reboot.

5.3.1.2 Failure in File System Deletion


If an error occurs deleting a file system, the installation is interrupted and the following message is issued
each time you login the system:
**************** THIS SYSTEM IS NOT CORRECTLY INSTALLED *****************
Error during execution of scextendfs.reboot
To fix the problem, check the log file in /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log
**************************************************************************
Look at the /SCINSTALL/scinstall.log file to know which is the meet problem and how to fix it before proceed.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When the error has been recovered remove the following files:

/SCINSTALL/scdeletefs.error_msg to remove the message to remove the message at login time.

/SCINSTALL/data/scdeletefs.env to prevent the deletion retry at the next reboot.

/sbin/rc3.d/S999scdeletefs.reboot to prevent the deletion retry at the next reboot.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

137 / 178

scmanageswp script can exit for some reason, the situation in which is possible to operate to exit from
the error are the following:

The procedure exit with error because there is a pending installation process in progress, see
paragraph 5.3.2.1.

The procedure has been abnormally terminated, see paragraph 5.3.2.2.

5.3.2.1 Pending Installation Process


At startup time scmanageswp checks if there is any pending installation process,
=>>> ERROR : SCINSTALL System startup script file detected.
This indicate a pending installation process !!!
=>>> ERROR

: Current program terminated.

Execute the workaround describes on paragraph 5.3.1 at page 136,for recover the mistake.
5.3.2.2 scmanageswp Abnormally Terminated
scmanageswp uses a flag directory to prevent multiple execution from different shells, if you start the
script when another it is already running it will terminate issuing the message:
=>>> ERROR : SCMANAGESWP procedure already running on system.
Multi activation is not allowed !!!
=>>> ERROR

: Current program terminated.

May occurs the flag directory it is not removed, for example when it is executed via telnet and a3 network
failure abnormally terminated the connection, in this case you have to manually unlock the synchronization
mechanism. Before proceed with the unlock you have to check there are no other scmanageswp running
instance by entering the commands:
...,sys,root # export UNIX95=true [Enter]
...,sys,root # ps fC scmanageswp [Enter]
Be careful, double check the command before press [Enter], because the ps command parameter can not be checked.

N.B.

If ps command does not issue any line you can proceed with the manual unlock by entering the command:
...,sys,root # rm r /tmp/.scswpsession [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Then start again scmanageswp.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

138 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.3.2 Recoverable Faults Managing SWP

5.3.2.3 Install.sh Abnormally Terminated

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Meaningful during an installation from CD only.


Using the command Install.sh <NMS/MNC name> cdrom to install a generic NMS/NMC Software
(1353NM, 1354RM, etc. see table in parag. 3.1.4.2 at page 29) from CD, could be displayed the following
error message:
ERROR:

cd label is blank (environment variable $SCI_KIT_LAB)

In this case, is necessary to execute the following commands:


a)

Dismount the CD currently mounted by entering:


...,sys,root# umount /SD_CDROM [Enter]

b)

Remove the CD from the driver.

c)

Insert the Software Distribution CD in the CD driver.

d)

Mount the CD at /SD_CDROM directory:


...,sys,root # scmountcd /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM[Enter[

e)

Start again the installation script entering:


...,sys,root# ./Install.sh <NMS/MNC name> cdrom [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

139 / 178

5.4 Kerberos Problems

5.4.1 Kerberos kdcd Process Not Running


It has been experienced the failure of Kerberos kdcd daemon process, the result of this failure is that no
activities can be performed on the system. To check if the kdcd process is running you can enter the command:
...,sys,root # ps edf | grep kdcd[Enter]
The output have to be like:
,sys,root # ps edf
root 573
1
root 916 573
root 9416 9363

|
0
0
0

grep kdcd
12:20:23 ? 0:01 /opt/krb5/sbin/kdcd l /dev/null
12:20:27 ? 0:04 /opt/krb5/sbin/kdcd l /dev/null
16:21:30 pts/ta
0:00 grep kdcd

The first workaround applicable is try to start it again by entering the command:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/krbsrv start [Enter]
If after the manual restart the process is not able to stay running, check the size of the file /opt/krb5/tmp/
pf/kdcd.pid . If it is zero byte length you have to delete it and the file /vat/tmp/rc_krbkdcd one:
...,sys,root # rm /opt/krb5/tmp/pf/kdcd.pid [Enter]
...,sys,root #rm /var/tmp/rc_krbkdcd [Enter]
Then try again to start kdcd.
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/krbsrv start [Enter]
5.4.2 Kerberos kdcd High CPU Consuming

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Has been observed that some times the kdcd process spends a long time to startup at CPU bound, the
resulting behavior is like the kdcd fail show in the previous paragraph, but the kdcd process is running CPU
bound (with top command it is shown with a CPU percent usage higher than 90%). in this case you have
to check the size of the file /vat/tmp/rc_krbkdcd, if it is larger than 10Mbyte you have to:
a)

Login as root user.

b)

Stop the kdcd process by entering the command:


...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/krbsrv stop [Enter]

c)

Remove the /vat/tmp/rc_kbrkdcd file:


...,sys,root #rm /var/tmp/rc_krbkdcd [Enter]

d)

Start the kdcd process by entering the command:


...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/krbsrv start [Enter]

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

140 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

There are two Kerberos known problems with possible troubleshooting.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.5 Device Full


Sometimes a file systems can get full, this situation can occur because different reasons, hereafter some
of them are explain.
5.5.1 Devise Full on /var Mounted File System
If the space on /var mounted file system is over, you can get same extra space by removing the patch saved
files.
N.B.

If you remove the patch saved files, no one of these patches could be removed any more.

To remove these files you have to:


a)

Login the system as root user,

b)

Remove the files by entering:


...,sys,root # rm r /var/adm/sw/save/*[Enter]

c)

Cleanup the patch status by entering:


...,sys,root # cleanup s [Enter]

5.5.2 Device full on /usr and /home


These two file systems can get full because of core file created by program termination, in this case is suggested to remove or copy in a different location the core files.
If the core file removal is not enough to reach an appreciable amount of free space, it is possible to extend
the file system. The file system extension can be executed when there are not allocated physical extent
on the logical volume or there are unused hard disks, and it is possible to perform a reboot of the system.
The command scextendfs i can be used to check how many free Mbyte are still available on the current
volume group configuration.
...,sys,root # scextendfs i [Enter]
The command output will be like the following:
___________________________________________________________________________
Volume Group Free Space
vg00
FreePE 172
(MBytes 11008) (pvg0=172)
___________________________________________________________________________
Hardware detection in progress, please wait ........

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Total disk(s) found = 6


Total CDRoms found = 1
Press [Enter] to continue...

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

141 / 178

Disks Selection
___________________________________________________________________________
Device MByte Hardware Path
Usage
Type
VolGroup
___________________________________________________________________________
c2t0d0 34720 0/1/1/0.0.0
Pri_Boot _Main_ vg00
c2t1d0 34720 0/1/1/0.1.0
_(free)_ ______ __________
___________________________________________________________________________
Press [Enter] to continue...
N.B.

If you have a disk mirror protection, the file system extension can ask for more than one
disk.
Before proceed within a 1359HA OSCluster environment you have to check that the
disks you want to use are not already in use from a different system.

If all precondition are met, you can enlarge the file system by entering the command:
...,sys,root # scextendfs <file system mount point> <desired free space> [Enter]
Analyze Mount Point:/usr
Request free MegaByte(s): 100
Evaluate size MegaByte(s): 1248
Extend Mount Point /usr to 1248 MByte
/usr successfully extended, new size will be available on next reboot
___________________________________________________________________________
System need reboot x complete extension of file system current in use
___________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The message System need reboot x complete extension of file system current in use means that the
extension will not available until system reboot.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

142 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

___________________________________________________________________________

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.6 Inittab Process Not restarting


Sometimes the processes specified in /etc/inittab file whit option respawn are not respawned correctly, it this case can be useful perform the following procedure:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

ED

Login the system as root user,


Replace the keyword respawn with once in the line corresponding to the not started process.
Ask init to reread the configuration file by entering:
...,sys,root # init q [Enter]
Restore back the keyword respawn instead of once just modified.
Ask again init to reread the configuration file by entering:
...,sys,root # init q [Enter]

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

143 / 178

Sometimes the Mirror Disk/UX is not chosen at HPUX installation time, and someone decide to install
it later, in this case you can apply this procedure.
5.7.1 Mirror Disk/UX Installation Prerequisite.
The Mirror Disk/UX requires the appropriate HP license to authorize the its usage, and the system shutdown due to two reboots.
5.7.2 Mirror Disk/UX Configuration Prerequisite
To be able to properly configure Mirror Disk/UX you must be sure to have enough hard disk available
to store another copy o the entire file system. The highest level of availability is reached by assigning hard
disks belonging to different SCSI chains. Refer to paragraph 3.2.2.1.12.1 Disk Mirror Configuration
Policy at page 50.
5.7.3 Mirror Disk/UX Installation
When you not choose the mirror configuration the Mirror Disk/UX is not installed, here the procedure
to manually install it:
a)
b)

c)

d)
e)
f)

Login the system as root and ask all the user to log out the system.
Insert the CD with label SWPOSCONFV7.1.0 volume UX64_2 in the device driver end mount it
by entering:
...,sys,root # mount r /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM [Enter]
To Install the Mirror DIsk/UX you have to enter the following command, but be careful because the
machine will be automatically rebooted:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM/MirrorDisk.sd x autoreboot=true LVM [Enter]
When the system will be ready again, you have to login again as root.
Mount the CD with:
...,sys,root # mount r /dev/dsk/<cdrom device file> /SD_CDROM [Enter]
Install the Mirror Disk/UX patches by entering the command, but be careful because the machine
will be automatically rebooted:
...,sys,root # swinstall s /SD_CDROM/MirrorPatch.sd x autoreboot=true \ [Enter]
x reinstall=true x software=* [Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

When the system will prompt you for login check in /var/adm/sw/swagent.log for any error met in the software of patch installation.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

144 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

5.7 Installing and Configuring Mirror Disk/UX

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

APPENDIX A SYSTEM TIPS


In this appendix some system tips are show.

A.1 Find the CDROM/DVDRMO Device File


Some activities require to know with is the CDROM/DVDROM device drive, hereafter the procedure to
know it.
First of all you have to login the system as root user, and enter the following ioscan command:
...sys,root# ioscan fnC disk [Enter]
The ioscan command output will be like this one:
,sys,root # ioscan fnkCdisk
Class
I H/W Path
Driver S/W State
H/W Type
Description
======================================================================
disk
0 0/0/1/1.2.0
sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39204LC
/dev/dsk/c1t2d0
/dev/rdsk/c1t2d0
disk
1 0/0/2/0.2.0
sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39204LC
/dev/dsk/c2t2d0
/dev/rdsk/c2t2d0
disk
2 0/0/2/1.2.0
sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
HP
DVDROM 305
/dev/dsk/c3t2d0
/dev/rdsk/c3t2d0
disk
3 0/4/0/0.8.0
sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39236LC
/dev/dsk/c4t8d0
/dev/rdsk/c4t8d0
disk
4 0/4/0/0.9.0
sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39236LC
/dev/dsk/c4t9d0
/dev/rdsk/c4t9d0
disk
5 0/7/0/0.12.0 sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39236LC
/dev/dsk/c5t12d0
/dev/rdsk/c5t12d0
disk
6 0/7/0/0.13.0 sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39236LC
/dev/dsk/c5t13d0
/dev/rdsk/c5t13d0
disk
7 0/7/0/0.14.0 sdisk CLAIMED
DEVICE
SEAGATE ST39173WC
/dev/dsk/c5t14d0
/dev/rdsk/c5t14d0
You have to identify a CDROM or a DVDROM device in the description column. Then you can double
check the device file by entering the diskinfo command with the raw device associate to it.
...,sys,root # diskinfo /dev/rdsk/<device file>
The diskinfo command related to the previous example will be:
,sys,root # diskinfo /dev/rdsk/c3t2d0
SCSI describe of /dev/rdsk/c3t2d0:
vendor: HP
product id: DVDROM 305
type: CDROM
size: 584768 Kbytes
bytes per sector: 2048:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The correct device type have to be CDROM.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

145 / 178

To safety stop the system it is suggested to perform the system shutdown. This activity allows to stop the
entire system by executing the shutdown procedure of each software component. The shutdown command is allowed only by root user and foresees many switches, the most used are r and h . The first
one performs the automatic reboot, and the second have to be used when you have to switch off the system power supply, because it halts the system.
A.2.1 System Shutdown with Reboot
The system shutdown command allows to perform the system reboot, by entering:
...,sys,root # shutdown r now [Enter]
A.2.2 System Halt
The system shutdown command allows to perform the system switch off, by entering:
...,sys,root # shutdown h now [Enter]
Wait until the RUN lamp is switched off or the system status gets in SHUT on the front display
before switch off the power supply.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

N.B.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

146 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

A.2 System Shutdown

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

APPENDIX B NMS/NMC SPECIFIC DATA


Alcatel Application Software is divided in two classes: Network Management Subsystem (NMS) and Network Management Components (NMC). The former class identifies systems that allow the Element Management (1353) or the Network Management (1354/1355), the latter one identifies optional functionalities
separately sold.

B.1 NMS Class


NMS are the basic items for installation purpose, them have a specific predisposal activity that allow them
the correct behavior, in the following list the NMS that can be predisposed by OSConf for NR7.0:

 OS_KERNEL V7.1.2 (Predispose V7.1.4)

This is the base platform for all the Alcatel TNM Applications. No instance is foreseen, but it has to
be always installed.

1353NM V7.3
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 
N.B.

You must install 1353NM on 1354 subsystem, and you have to create a 1353NM
instance for each 1353NM system under control of 1354 one.

1354RM V7.4
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 

1354BMETH V7.3
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
1359HA OSCluster Protection 
type: Master  Client  Spare system  ( only for 1359HA OSCluster )
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 

1355VPN
V5.0.3
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

(*) Not useful for Client




ED

1354SN V5.0
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type: Master  Client 
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 
02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

147 / 178

1354SY V7.4
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type: Master  Client 
Size(*):Small  Medium  Large 

B.2 NMC Class


The NMC are software components, usually installed to provide additional feature only on an already
installed NMS (or planned to be installed).
1359HA_OSRES and 1353SHBKW require the system predispose before installing them,
but the 1353SHBKW installation is done inside the 1353NM one
Only 1359HA OSResilience requires a system predisposal.
NMC Name

NMS Dependencies.

1359IOO V5.2

1353NM 7.0 and 1354RM

1359ISN V5.0

1354RM

1359HA_OSRES V7.1.1
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type:
Master 
2 Client 
4 Client 
8 Client 

1353NM, 1354BM and 1354RM

1353SH V7.0 (1353SHBKW)


Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type:
Client 

1353NM 7.3

Instance Definition: Identifier N ______


type:
Client 
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type:
Client 
Instance Definition: Identifier N ______
type:
Client 

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

ED

1354BM ETH MEDIATOR

V1.1.7

1354RM

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

148 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

B.3 Disk Requirement Tables


The following table shows the disk space requested for swap, program installation, and depot packages.
The value are specified in M bytes
NMS

Swap Required

Software Size

Depot Package Size

OSKernel

100

2600

1000

1353NM

500

7500

4000

1354BM ETH

500

1120

350

1354BM PR

200

100

35

1354RM

500

1120

600

1355VPN

500

500

10

1359HA OSRES

100

10

1359ISN

N.A.

N.A.

100

1359IOO

N.A.

N.A.

40

NR7.4 ADDENDUM 1

N.A.

N.A.

1100

Table 10. Disk requirements for NMS Software for NR7.4

NMS

Master Small
Swap

OSKernel

Data

Master Medium

Master Large

Presentation(*)

Swap

Data

Swap

Data

Swap

Data

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

200

500

3000

1500

5000

2500

9000

250

250

1354BM ETH

1500

3000

3500

5000

7500

9000

2000

200

1354BM PR

3500

1700

3000

500

1354RM

1500

3000

3500

5000

7500

9000

2000

400

1354SN

1000

1000

1500

2000

2500

5000

300

300

500

3000

1353NM

1355VPN

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

1359HA OSCLS

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

1359HA OSRES

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

N.A.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Table 11. Disk Requirements for NMS Instances for NR7.4

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

149 / 178

B.4 Alcatel CD Codes

CD Label

CD Code

Description

SWPOSCONF_BOOTV7.1.1
DVD

3AL 89070 AAAA 01

hpux 11i installation tool. DVD 1/1.

SWPOSCONF_PLTV7.1.1 DVD

3AL 89070 BAAA 01

OSConf and 3PP software. DVD 1/1

SWPOSCONF_BOOTV7.1.1 CD

3AL 89070 DAAA 01

hpux 11i installation tool.


CD 1/2, 2/2.

SWPOSCONF_PLTV7.1.1 CD

3AL 89070 EAAA 01

OSConf and 3PP software.


CD 1/4, 2/4, 3/4 and 4/4.

SWPOSCONF_ADDV7.1.1_P04
DVD

3AL 89070 FAAA 01

OSConf and 3PP software Addendum


and Patches. DVD 1/1.

SWPOSCONF_ADDV7.1.1_P04
CD

3AL 89070 CDAA 01

OSConf and 3PP software Addendum


and Patches. CD 1/2 and 2/2.

SWPOS_KERNELV7.1.2

3AL 88872 ACAA 01

OSKernel and installation tools.


CD 1/2 and 2/2

SWP1353NM_APPV7.3

3AL 89091 AAAA 01

1353NM NMS Software.


CD 1/7, 2/7, 3/7, 4/7, 5/7, 6/7 and 7/7.

SWP1354RM_APPV7.4

3AL 61118 AAAA 01

1354RM Regional Manager. CD 1/1.

SWP1354BM_ETHV7.3.0.5_P2

3AL 86509 ABAA 02

1354BM Ethernet Manager Second


Edition. CD 1/1.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

SWP1353BM_PRV7.2

3AG 23934 ACAA 01 1354BM PR Manager. CD 1/1.

SWP1353BM_ATMV7.1.4

3AG 23908 AFAA 01

1354BM ATM Manager. CD 1/1.

SWP1354SY_APPV7.4

3AL 70927 AAAA 01

Synchronization Manager. CD 1/1.

SWP1355VPN_APPV5.0

3AL 72155 AAAA 01

1355VPN Virtual Private Network.


CD 1/1.

SWP1359IOO_APPV5.2

3AL 88344 ACAA 02

1359IOO Generic OSOS Interface


Software Second Edition. CD 1/1.

SWP1359ISN_APPV5.0

3AL 88243 AAAA 01

1359ISN Open Interface Software.


CD 1/1.

SWP1359HA_OSCLSV7.1

3AL 88115 ABAA 01

1359HA OS Cluser. CD 1/1.

SWP1359HA_OSRESV7.1.1

3AL 88118 ADAA 01

1359HA OS Resilience. CD 1/1

SWPNR74_ADD01

3AL 88944 AAAA 02

NR7.4 Software Mandatory Addendum


Second Edition.
CD 1/3, 2/3 and 3/3

Table 12. Alcatel NR7.4 Media codes

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

150 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

The following table provides the Alcatel CD codes of all media provided with NR7.4

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

APPENDIX C GOGLOBALUX INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION

C.1 GoGlobalUX Installation on HPUX System


The GoGlobalUX software is already installed on the HPUX system foreseen for Alcatel TMN application.

C.2 GoGlobalUX Installation on PC


To install the software, perform the following steps:
a)

Open a DOS window on PC and type the following commands:


c:\> ftp <host_IP> [Enter]
user : <username> [Enter]
password : <password> [Enter]
where:
<host_IP>
<username>
<password>
Continue with:
ftp>
ftp>
ftp>
ftp>

= is the IP address of the Unix machine where GOGlobal is installed;


= is the username of UNIX operator;
= is the password relative to the <username> indicated.

cd /opt/graphon/pc [Enter]
bin [Enter]
get go_setup_2*.exe [Enter]
quit [Enter]

b)

Double click on the executable.

c)

The Install Shield Wizard window will be opened:

Figure 25. GoGlobalUX Logo

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The installation application checks if there is a previous version installed. If a previous version is
found remove it by follow the instruction in paragraph Automatic Removal of GoGlobalUX/Previous Version C.2.1 at page 154 , otherwise proceed with the next point.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

151 / 178

The next window will be opened showing the welcome message:

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

d)

Click on Next to go on. Wait a few seconds the install procedure.


e)

The License Agreement window will be opened:

Click on Yes to go on.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

f)

The Destination Location window will be opened:

Choose your destination location and click on Next to go on. Wait a few seconds the install procedure.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

152 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

g)

The Install Shield Wizard Complete window will be opened:

Click on Finish to go on.


h)

The Connection window will be opened

You have to insert the Server Address of the machine that you want to be connected to.
Click on Connect. The Authentication window will be opened

You have to insert:

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Username
Password
Click on OK. GoGlobalUX will open a connection with the configured machine.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

153 / 178

If installing GoGlobalUX a previous version in installed the application asks you the authorization to remove it by issuing the window:

To upgrade the software press the O.K. button.


Then the script ask you to remove also the GoGlobal user setting, if you want to maintain the connection
descriptions press NO button.

The the previous GoGlobalUX will be removed from the PC.


When the removal will be completed the following window will be shown on the screen.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

You can now install the new version of the software by stating again the installation application.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

154 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.2.1 Automatic Removal of GoGlobalUX/Previous Version

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3 GoGlobalUX license


The GoGlobalUX XEmulator for Microsoft Windows personal computers requires to be authorized
with a license key. The permanent licenses provided are network floating, that means you need one or
more license server machine in your network.
The Bridges 1.1 license are still useful for running GoGlobalUX 2.

C.3.1 License servers definition rules


Before to require the GoGlobalUX license(s), you have to decide how many and what will be the license
server machine(s) in your network, in accordance with the following rules:

If you have three or more machines, you have to setup a Three Redundant License Servers configuration, in accordance with the following rules:.

the three license server machines should be located physically close to each other (if possible).

never configure redundant servers with slow communications or dialup links.


With threeserver redundancy,only one of the three servers is master, capable of issuing licenses.
Since all clients must contact the master, all clients must have reliable networking to a single node.

if in your network there are less than three nodes, you have to define a the license server, and all the
required licenses have to be loaded on that server.

On the license server machine(s) will be loaded the license(s) data obtained as showed in the paragraph
C.3.3.
C.3.2 Retrieve License Servers Identity
Meaningful only for the license server machine(s).
When you have selected the license server machine(s), for each of them you have to retrieve the machine
identity by executing the following commands:
a)

Log in as root on the machine.

b)

Get the hostname of the current machine:


..,sys,root # uname

c)

[Enter]

Get the FLEXlm host ID of the current machine:


..,sys,root # /opt/graphon/bin/lmhostid

[Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

The obtained data will be used in a successive phase of the license request activity.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

155 / 178

C.3.3 Permanent License Request

After that, you can to require the necessary license(s) to activate GoGlobalUX on your machine(s) visiting
the GraphOn Licensing web site through your web browser, by typing the following URL:
http://www.graphon.com/support/license.shtml
The following window will appear:

Figure 26. GraphOn License WEB Page

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Click on GoGlobal Permanent Licenses and the following registration form will appear:

Figure 27. GraphOn License WEB Page Registration

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

156 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Meaningful only for the license server machine(s).

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Scroll down along the window using the scroll bar and fill the following fields about the required registration
information:

Name
Company
Address & Address2
City
State/Province
Country
Postal Code
Phone
Email Address

(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(2)
(1)
(1)
(1)
(1)

(1) Introduce the data of the reference person near the customer or the your own ones.
(2) Leave it as Not Specified when the system is located outside of U.S.A..
Fill in the data, then click on Next> button to continue with the next window.
The Software Agreement window will appear:

Figure 28. GraphOn License WEB Page Software Agreement

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Scroll down until the bottom of the window using the scroll bar and click on I Accept button to continue.
The License Information window will appear:

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

157 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 29. GraphOn License WEB Page License Data Entry


If you have one or more PURCHASED GraphOn LICENSE FOR ALCATEL USE OR RESALE
document, you have to repeat the following operations for each Product Code value indicated.
Like this, you will obtain one or more NOT demo licenses.

N.B.

Scroll down along the window using the scroll bar and fill the following fields:

Product Code (see the Product Code value on the PURCHASED GraphOn LICENSE FOR ALCATEL USE FOR RESALE document if present)
Host Name (see the paragraph C.3.2)
Host ID (see the paragraph C.3.2)

Now if you have the Three Redundant License Servers configuration you have to set YES in the box
close to the label Are you using redundant servers?, and fill in the three couple of information: Hostname and Hostid with the data of each license server.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

and click on Get License button to continue.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

158 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 30. GraphOn License WEB Page License Output Example

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Put the showed data in the license file of the license server machine (see the paragraph C.3.4.1.1) and
click on the Back button to come back to the Product Code window to require (eventually) another license
otherwise, if you are terminated, click on File and Close option to exit from the web browser.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

159 / 178

GraphOn Corp. provides both permanent or demo license, hereafter some information to help you to configure the GoGlobalUX license files and daemons.
C.3.4.1Permanent License
GoGlobalUX permanent licenses are provided as network floating point, that meas you have to promote one or three machines a License Server and all the other will be License Client.
To be able to use them you have to perform the following actions:
1)
2)
3)
4)

Store the authorization key in the license file.


Configure the license servers machine(s).
Start the license server daemons.
Configure license client system(s) (if any)

C.3.4.1.1 Store the Authorization Key in the License File.


The first activity is to store the license authorization key previously obtained by GraphOn WEB page (see
C.3.3 at page 156) in the /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat file of any the license server machine. To create
this file, use the command (as root):
..,sys,root # vi /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat [Enter]
During the insertion of the license data, you have to modify the line of SERVER definition adding
the port number 27011 at the endofline (see example below).
After that, save and quit the file pressing [Esc] and typing :x! and [Enter].
N.B.

Example of /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat file with three servers and two licenses (INCREMENT options)
defined:
# NOTE: You can change the hostname on the SERVER line.
#
You can also add a port number after the hostid on
#
the SERVER line, like:
#
SERVER hostname.domain.com 00HOSTID0 27001
#
which will make the lmgrd managing this file use
#
port 27001.
#
Most other changes will invalidate this file.
#
ISSUED_DATE=23jan2002
#
SERVER host_c 77fd17fe
SERVER host_d 77df65d1
SERVER host_e 7751b870
VENDOR graphon
INCREMENT UX graphon 2.0 permanent FDE548BE0802 ck=164
Add TCP port number (27011) at any line beginning with SERVER:
Example from:
SERVER host_c 839dc26
to:
SERVER host_c 839dc26 27011

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Copy this file on each license server when the three redundant configuration is foreseen.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

160 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.4 GoGlobalUX authorization procedure

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.4.1.2 Configure License Server(s)


Now you have to configure License Server machine(s) that need to provide the GoGlobalUX floating license on the network.
C.3.4.1.2.1 Configure license_server.dat file
An Alcatel extension to the GraphOn license management is the license_server.dat file. This file has to
declare all the license servers useful for retrieving license from any host need to use them licenses, including the license servers hosts themselves.
The easy to proceed is create these files on the license server(s) and them distribute them to the client
when configuring it.
Each time you change the license_server.dat file the changes will be recognize only at next GoGlobalUX statup.
To declare the license server machines you have to create the file /opt/graphon/etc/license_servers.dat
and fill in it with the following syntax:
SERVER <host> <port>
Where:

SERVER

is a keyword

<host>

means the hostname or the IP address of the license server

<port>

is the IP port number stored in the license.dat file as fourth field of the line
starting with SERVER, if that field is blank 27000 have to be used.

Example: Use the command (as root):


..,sys,root # vi /opt/graphon/etc/license_server.dat

[Enter]

create the file so that it contains the following data:


SERVER host_c 27011
SERVER host_d 27011
SERVER host_e 27011
Save typing :x! and [Enter].
Copy this file on each HPUX system that have to be able to run GOGlobal UX graphical interface, to
allow it the GOGlobal UX licence retrieval.
C.3.4.2Start License Server and GraphOn Daemons
When both license.dat and license_server.dat files have been properly configured on all the License Server machine(s) you can proceed with the daemon startup.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Because hpux startup launch both License and GraphOn Daemons, it is advisable to execute the daemon stop before. The entire procedure will be:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux stop [Enter]
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux start [Enter]
When the daemons will be started on the single license server on at least two license server nodes for the
three redundant configuration, you will be able to open a GoGlobalUX 2.0 session from any PC to the
license server machine.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

161 / 178

To be able to access the hpux machine via GoGlobalUX you need to get a license, this license will
be granted by the license server(s) via network, that means any hpux system (license client) have to
be able to connect the license server(s) via network. Moreover the license server(s) have to be referred
by name.
C.3.4.3.1 Verify License Server Connectivity
Before starting the client machine configuration you have to verify the license server machine(s) connectivity, the easiest way to do it is try a ping to any license server host name:
..,sys,root # ping <Hostname> [Enter]
where <Hostname> is the name of the remote license server machine(s).

If the server replies the ping request an output like the following will be provided:
,sys,root # ping hostc 64 2
PING hostc: 64 byte packets
64 bytes from 192.202.21.8: icmp_seq=0. time=0. ms
64 bytes from 192.202.21.8: icmp_seq=1. time=0. ms
hostc PING Statistics
2 packets transmitted, 2 packets received, 0% packet loss
roundtrip (ms) min/avg/max = 0/0/0

Otherwise, there is something wrong. From the error message issued by telnet you can have an idea
of the problem.

ping: Unknown host <Hostname>


Means the license serve <Hostname> is not defined in the host name repository, if you know
also license server IP address you can add it to the host name repository (see paragraph 3.4
at page 88 for more information). When the license server hostname will be present in the host
name repository retry ping command.

2 packets transmitted, 0 packets received, 100% packet loss


If no one of the ping request is replayed, the are three know possibility:
a)
b)
c)

The remote server is down.


The remote server is not reachable because the IP address is wrong.
The remote server is not reachable because there is no known route on the network

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

First of all it is better to verify that the server is running. It the server is running check on the
/etc/host file if the IP address defined for the specified server is correct. If also the IP address
is correct, the reason can depend by the Default Gateway, check is adefault gateway si defined
and reachable. If you do not know name and IP address of the network default gateway refer
to the network administrator.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

162 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.4.3Configure License Client System(s)

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.4.3.2 Verify License Daemon on Server


When the license server machine(s) are reachable, you can also verify on each one of them if the license
daemons are running on these machine(s). this can be done with the following procedure:
This check can be done only if the license server machine(s) are already configured.

N.B.

..,sys,root # export LM_LICENSE_FILE=27011@<Hostname>


..,sys,root # /opt/graphon/bin/lmstat a [Enter]

[Enter]

If the file license daemons are active, an output like the following will be displayed:
lmstat Copyright (C) 19892002 Globetrotter Software, Inc.
Flexible License Manager status on Fri 12/5/2003 10:07
License server status: 27011@host_c,27011@host_d,27011@host_e
License file(s) on host_c: /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat:
host_c: license server UP (MASTER) v8.2
host_d: license server UP v8.2
host_e: license server UP v8.2
Vendor daemon status (on host_c):
graphon: UP v8.2
Feature usage info:
Users of bridges:

(Total of 2 licenses available)

The shown output is related to a three redundant server configuration, if you have a single license server, the data shown with italic font will be not shown.

N.B.

Otherwise an error message advise you of a problem, check the status of the daemons on the license server them selves.
C.3.4.3.3 Copy the license_server.dat File from a License Server

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

All the configuration precondition are now verified, it is possible to configure the license client machine,
the configuration consists only in creating a copy of the license_server.dat file from a license server machine to this one. Like for servers, when the license_server.dat file is created or modified the daemons
have to be stopped and started to catch the changes.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

163 / 178

In order to check the correct definition of the license server in the license_server.dat file you can execute
the script /opt/graphon/etc/check_server.
..,sys,root # /opt/graphon/etc/check_server

[Enter]

If the configuration is correct the output have to contain one set of line for each server defined, like the
following example:
lmstat Copyright (C) 19892002 Globetrotter Software, Inc.
Flexible License Manager status on Fri 12/5/2003 10:20
License server status: 27011@host_c,27011@host_d,27011@host_e
License file(s) on host_c: /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat://:
host_c: license server UP (MASTER) v8.2
host_d: license server UP v8.2
host_e: license server UP v8.2
Vendor daemon status (on host_c):
graphon: UP v8.2
Feature usage info:
Users of bridges:

(Total of 5 licenses available)

C.3.4.3.4 ReStart the GraphOn Daemons


Because hpux startup launch GraphOn Daemons, it is advisable to execute the daemon stop before.
The entire procedure will be:
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux stop[Enter]
...,sys,root # /sbin/init.d/goglobalux start[Enter]

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Now the system ready, you can open a GoGlobalUX 2.1 session from any PC to the this machine until
at least one license is available on the servers.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

164 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.4.3.3.1 Check the License Server

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

C.3.5 Add a new license(s)


Sometimes in the system live it is necessary to increase the number of users, that means also the number
of concurrent session have to be increased. To add a new license on a running the license server machine
without close the current open interfaces, you have to proceed this way:
Do not mix permanent floating authorization key with demo one in the same file!
a)

Buy the GraphOn license(s).

b)

Require the authorization key via GraphOn WEB Page providing the same host ID of the already
requested keys (the host id are related to the license servers!). Hereby an example of a new authorization key requested for the license servers already see in the paragraph C.3.4.1.1 at page 160. You
can see the server lines have the same values in the third field that means the same host ID.
#
# NOTE: You can change the hostname on the SERVER line.
#
You can also add a port number after the hostid on
#
the SERVER line, like:
.
.
#
ISSUED_DATE=23jan2002
#
SERVER host_c 77fd17fe
SERVER host_d 77df65d1
SERVER host_e 7751b870
VENDOR graphon
INCREMENT UX graphon 2.0 permanent 1BB31C150136 \
user_info=Paolo Rossi\
paolo.rossi@alcatel.it ISSUER=GrapOn \
Corporation ISSUED=08jan2002 NOTICE=Copyright (C) \
19962002 GraphOn Corporation. All Rights Reserved ck=45

c)

You have to copy the INCREMENT line(s) from the just received authorization key a the end of the
/opt/graphon/etc/license.dat file:
N.B.

When a back slash \ is present at the end of line, also the next line have to be included.
..,sys,root # vi /opt/graphon/etc/license.dat

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

1)

ED

[Enter]

Move to last line in file and insert the INCREMENT line(s). For example, if you have the authorization key shown at page 160 active on the system, and receive from GraphOn the one shown
at page 165, the resulting file will be:
#
# NOTE: You can change the hostname on the SERVER line.
#
You can also add a port number after the hostid on
.
.
#
#
ISSUED_DATE=23jan2002
#
SERVER host_c 77fd17fe 27011
SERVER host_d 77df65d1 27011
SERVER host_e 7751b870 27011
VENDOR graphon
INCREMENT UX graphon 2.0 permanent FDE548BE0802 ck=164

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

165 / 178

2)
d)

Save and exit vi file pressing [Esc] and typing :x! and [Enter].

Then ask license daemon to reread the license.dat file:


..,sys,root # cd /opt/graphon/bin [Enter]
..,sys,root # ./lmreread c ../etc/license.dat

[Enter]

After completing these steps, the new GoGlobalUX licenses will be available.
C.3.5.1Demo Licenses

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

GoGlobalUX demo license can be retrieve from the GraphOn Web server. The demo license are node
locked, and to use them you have just to copy the authorization key into the license.dat file, and delete
license_server.dat if exists.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

166 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

INCREMENT UX graphon 2.0 permanent 1BB31C150136 \


user_info=Paolo Rossi\
paolo.rossi@alcatel.it ISSUER=GrapOn \
Corporation ISSUED=08jan2002 NOTICE=Copyright (C) \
19962002 GraphOn Corporation. All Rights Reserved ck=45

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

APPENDIX D HP 9000 SERVER CABLE CONNECTION


This appendix shows the suggested connections for the SCSI and Fibre Channel cable for the HP servers
foreseen, an example picture is provided for each server model.

D.1 HP9000 K Class


The K Class server foreseen are: K360, K370 and k380.
To guarantee the higher performance level, the FWSCSI buses located on HSC board have to be used.
In the HAS disk cabinet there are two different buses (BusA and BusB), able to connect 4 disks unit each
one.
We can now focus on the FWSCSI connections for this kind of server:
a)

In the first kind of server (with two disk enclosures) the FWSCSI1 bus is connected to the connector
1 of the BusB in the HAS0. The connector 2 of the BusB is connected to the connector 2 of the BusA.
The connector 1 of the BusA is closed with a SCSI terminator.
The FWSCSI2 bus is connected to the connector 1 of the BusB in the HAS1. The connector 2 of the
BusB is connected to the connector 2 of the BusA. The connector 1 of the BusA is closed with a SCSI
terminator.
HSC
FWSCSI 1

CPU

: FWSCSI cable
: FWSCSI terminator
: FWSCSI connector

FWSCSI 2

HAS0
1

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

HAS1

Figure 31. Rear view of server with two disk cabinets

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

167 / 178

In the second kind of server (with one disk cabinet) the FWSCSI1 bus is connected to the connector
1 of the BusB in the HAS, and the connector 2 of the BusB is closed with a SCSI terminator.
The FWSCSI2 bus is connected to the connector 1 of the BusA and the connector 2 of the BusA is
closed with a SCSI terminator.
HSC
CPU

FWSCSI 1
: FWSCSI cable
: FWSCSI terminator
FWSCSI 2

: FWSCSI connector

HAS
1

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 32. Rear view of server with one disk cabinet

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

168 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

b)

c)

The last configuration is just an example of K Class server cluster, with three nodes.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

: FWSCSI cable
: FWSCSI terminator
: FWSCSI connector

FWSCSI 1

FWSCSI 1

FWSCSI 1

FWSCSI 2

FWSCSI 2

FWSCSI 2

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

Bus B
2

Bus A
2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 33. Example of K server cluster

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

169 / 178

D.2 HP 9000 R Class

For the server R the recommended configuration of the HSC and Lan boards is indicated in
Figure 34. :
The HSC boards should be placed in position 1 and TURBO.
If you have a supplementary Lan board it should be placed in position 3.

N.B.

CPU

: SCSI cable

FWSCSI 1

: SCSI terminator
FWSCSI 2
TURBO 3

: FWSCSI connector

HSC

HAS
1
Bus B
2

1
Bus A
2

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 34. Rear view of server R with one disk cabinet

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

170 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

This paragraph shows the suggested SCSI connections for the R Class servers.

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.3 HP9000 L Class and RP5430


The HP9000 server L class and RP5430 are provided without any disk cabinet. These servers have all
the disks inside the CPU cabinet accessible from the front.
In the following schematic picture the location of the disk on the right side of the cabinet, their role in the
mirroring configuration and their hardware path (and device file names) are shown.
Copy disks
/0/0/2/0.0.0
(c2t0d0)

/0/0/2/0.2.0
(c2t2d0)

DVD
/0/0/1/0.0.0
(c1t0d0)

/0/0/1/0.2.0
(c1t2d0)

Main disks
Figure 35. Front view of L Server (without cover panel)

PCI Slots
Lan RJ45
Connector

Console/UPS Connector (connect the Web console to


the connector labeled CONSOLE)
VHDCI Connector useful for DAT (using cable VHDCI to 50 pin).
Figure 36. Rear view of L Server

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

If a DLT tape driver is present in this configuration, an extra SCSI adapter will be provided (A4800A). It
has be place in one of the slots: from 7 to 12. Then connect the connect the DLT tape driver via FWSCSI
68 pin cable.
N.B.

Install the additional PCI cards starting from the top of PCI Slots.

N.B.

Before connect the DLT tape to the SCSI bus check the SCSI ID switch placed on the rear is
set to value 3.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

171 / 178

The A Class and RP2430 are the HP9000 server entry levels, them are not provided with external disks
and can equip up to two hard disk units. These hard disks are located in the server front, behind a little
door located on the left side.
Each disk is connected to a different SCSI bus, that guarantee the high availability.

Disks Location

Figure 37. Front view of A Class and RP2430 Servers (without cover panel)

D.5 HP9000 RP3410 and RP3440


RP3410 and RP3440 are the HP9000 system based on PA8800 processors, them requires the OSConf
7.0.5 P04 (Dec 03) bootable edition to be installed. The difference between the two system is related to
the number of CPUs, RP3410 is foreseen with just one, instead RP3440 with two.
Two system looks is the same from outside, the most relevant characteristic is the disk bay, it foreseen
up to three hard disk slots, but just two SCSI busses. Because of this the machine are provided with two
hard disks, that have to be placed in the slots: HDD 1 and HDD 3.
HDD 1
HDD 2
HDD 3

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 38. RP3410 and RP3440 Server Front

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

172 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.4 HP9000 A Class and RP2430

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.6 HP9000 RP4440


RP4440 are the high end computer equipped with PA8800 processor and require the OSConf 7.0.5 P04
(Dec 03) bootable edition to be installed. It is expandable up to eight CPU and foreseen up to sixteen GB
of RAM.
The typical configuration foreseen an external disk storage. In the following figures is shown how to connect rp4440 to DS2405 Fiber Channel and to MSA30 Ultra320 SCSI disk storages.
D.6.1 RP4440 with DS2405
DS2405 Disk System Front view
1

10

11 12 13 14 15

Figure 39. RP4440 Front View without fromt pannel.

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

DS2405 Disk System Rear view

Figure 40. RP4440 Rear View

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

173 / 178

D.6.2 RP4440 with MSA30


MSA30 Disk System Front view
2

10 11 12 13 14

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Figure 41. RP4440 Front View withou fron pannel


MSA30 Disk Storage Rear View

: VHDCI SCSI connector

: VHDCI SCSI cable

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 42. RP4440 Rear View

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

174 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.7 HP9000 N Class and RP7400


The HP disk technology innovation trend brought us to introduce new disk storage in the highend class
server, the supported server/disk storage configuration are:
Server Model

Disk Storage

N4000

SC10

RP7400

SC10, DS2405

D.7.1 HP9000 N Class and RP7400 with SC10


This paragraph provides the instructions for the configuration of the HP HP9000 N Class and RP7400
server configured with the SC10 external disk cabinet. This disk cabinet needs to be configured to correctly
support the disk mirroring, in fact the SC10 issued by HP is usually configured in a different way.
The configuration is related to the dip switch located on the two bus control cards (BCCs). All the SCSI
connectors provided by N4000 server are Very High Density Cable Interconnect (VHDCI) connectors
: VHDCI SCSI cable
: VHDCI SCSI terminator
: VHDCI SCSI connector

NOTE: Dip switchorientation is reverted


on the bottom controller

I
I I

I
O

: HD SCSI terminator

5 4 3 2 1
O

: HD SCSI cable 68pin


A
SC10

A
DAT

PCI Slots

6
12
11 The two internal
5
are place
10 disks
in this location4
9
3
8
2
1
7

DVD

PCI Slots

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 43. Rear view of N/RP74xx Server with SC10


N.B.

The position of the components in the rack is not predictable, so the N4000 server can be placed
on top of SC10.

N.B.

It is advisable to install the PCI cards balancing them in the right and left slots, starting from the
bottom.

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

175 / 178

This paragraph provides the instructions for the configuration of the HP HP9000 RP7400 server configured with the DS2405 external disk cabinet.
To implement the disk mirroring on DS2405 Disk Storage, the cabinet have to be connected in
dualaccess mode, that means the disks can be accessed by two ways, the side effect of this
cable connection is that the hard disks are shown twice.
: VHDCI SCSI cable

Fiber Channel Connector

: VHDCI SCSI terminator

: HD SCSI terminator

: VHDCI SCSI connector

: HD SCSI cable 68pin

DVD

DAT

PCI Slots

6
12
11 The two internal 5
are place
10 disks
in this location 4
9
3
8
2
1
7

PCI Slots

DS2405 Disk System Rear view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 44. RP7400 Server with DS2405

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

176 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.7.2 HP9000 RP7400 with DS2405

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.7.3 HP9000 RP7410 with DS2405


This paragraph provides the instructions for the configuration of the HP HP9000 RP7410 server configured with the DS2405 external disk cabinet.
To implement the disk mirroring on DS2405 Disk Storage, the cabinet have to be connected in
dualaccess mode, that means the disks can be accessed by two ways, the side effect of this
cable connection is that the hard disks are shown twice.

Fiber Channel Connector

: VHDCI SCSI cable

: HD SCSI terminator

: VHDCI SCSI terminator

: HD SCSI cable 68pin

: VHDCI SCSI connector

DAT
DVD
1 2

3 4

5 6 7 8 1 2

3 4

5 6 7 8

DS2405 Disk System Rear view

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Figure 45. Rear view of RP7410 Server with DS2405

ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

177 / 178

This paragraph provides the instructions for the configuration of the HP HP9000 RP7410 server configured with the VA7110 external disk cabinet connected via fiber channel swicth.
To implement the disk mirroring on DS2405 Disk Storage, the cabinets have to be connected in
dualaccess mode, that means the disks can be accessed by two ways, the side effect of this
cable connection is that the hard disks are shown twice.

Fiber Channel Connecto

: VHDCI SCSI cable

: HD SCSI terminator

: VHDCI SCSI terminator

: HD SCSI cable 68pin

: VHDCI SCSI connector

DAT
DVD

RP7410
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DAT
DVD

RP7410
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

DAT
DVD

RP7410
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 81 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

FC Switch

FC Switch

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Virtual Array VA7110


Rear view

Figure 46. Rear view of RP7410 Server with DS2405

END OF DOCUMENT
ED

02
3AL 88924 BAAA
178

178 / 178

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

D.7.4 HP9000 RP7410 Cluster with VA7110

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this


document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

LABELS AND ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS


TARGHETTE E INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE


THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK
3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02
1350 Management Suite
1350 Rel.7.4
NR7.4 INSTALLATION GUIDE
COD.MANUALE HDBK P/N:

ORIGINALE INTERLEAF: FILE ARCHIVIAZIONE: cod ANV (PD1-PD2)

No PAGINE TOTALI PER ARCHIVIAZIONE: 180+4=184


DIMENSIONE BINDER SORGENTE (du ks): 65.220 Kbytes

INFORMAZIONI PER IL CENTRO STAMPA - ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

STAMPARE FRONTE/RETRO RECTO-VERSO PRINTING

COMPOSIZIONE ED ASSIEMAGGIO DEL MANUALE:


HANDBOOK COMPOSITION AND ASSEMBLY:
SERVONO 5 BUSTE TRASPARENTI (Es.Cod.854.010.051 H)
FIVE TRANSPARENT PLASTIC ENVELOPES ARE NECESSARY
No pagine
(facciate)
No pages

numerate
numbered
da from

a to

1/178

178/178

TARGHETTE - LABELS
frontespizio
front

3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

manuale
manual

2
178

INSERIRE LE 5 BUSTE TRASPARENTI


INSERT FIVE TRANSPARENT PLASTIC ENVELOPES
TOTALE PAGINE A4 (FACCIATE) TOTAL A4 PAGES:

180

TOTALE FOGLI A4 TOTAL A4 SHEETS:

90

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

WARNING FOR A-UNITS OTHER THAN A-ITALY


Labels are done according to A-Italy binder format.
Source files: ALICE 6.10 ARCHIVED BY GAPI 4.1

ED

02

RELEASED
3AL 88924 BAAA
4

1/ 4

QUESTA PAGINA NON VA INSERITA NEL MANUALE


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

THIS PAGE MUST NOT BE INCLUDED IN THE HANDBOOK


Site

1350 NR7.4

Originators
B.Bosisio
M.Occhietti

NR 7.4
INSTALLATION GUIDE

Domain
Division
Rubric
Type
Distribution Codes

:
:
:
:

OND
NM
1350
Internal :

External

Approvals
Name
App.

F.Casasole

Name
App.

INFORMAZIONI EDITORIALI

ORIGINALE SU FILE: ALICE 6.10

sistemazione figlist

3AL 88924 BAAA


Ed.02
1350 Management Suite
1350 Rel.7.4
NR7.4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

Network Release
INSTALLATION GUIDE

ED

02

RELEASED
3AL 88924 BAAA
4

2/ 4

1350 Management Suite


All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

1350 Rel.7.4
Network Release
NR7.4

INSTALLATION GUIDE
3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

VOL.1/1

1350 Management Suite


1350 Rel.7.4
Network Release
NR7.4
INSTALLATION GUIDE
3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

VOL.1/1
1350 Management Suite
1350 Rel.7.4
3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

Network Release
NR7.4
INSTALLATION GUIDE

VOL.1/1

1350 Management Suite 1350 Rel.7.4


3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

Network Release
NR7.4
INSTALLATION GUIDE

VOL.1/1

1350 Management Suite


1350 Rel.7.4
Network Release
NR7.4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

3AL 88924 BAAA Ed.02

ED

02

INSTALLATION GUIDE

VOL.1/1

RELEASED
3AL 88924 BAAA
4

3/ 4

1AA 00014 0004 (9007) A4 ALICE 04.10

FINE DEL DOCUMENTO INTERNO END OF INTERNAL DOCUMENT

ED

02

RELEASED

3AL 88924 BAAA

4/ 4
All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this
document, use and communication of its contents
not permitted without written authorization from Alcatel.

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen